Home

KYOCERA P4040dn

1. 6 4 USB 5 2j Mee 6 5 o 6 5 siu 6 5 Wireless NetWork 5sesixaiaiz un kRaE YE ARES REIR EEERUUEURU RE SE LRER UTER NR EEC A ARRA DUM SURE EIERUMNR MULUS ER LL OU AUD Ka AE 6 6 6 1 Status Menu Displaying the Status Menu Screen If Status is displayed at the left of the bottom row of the message display Ready to print PE Ad BpA4 TE e Status Job Status Job Log Network m Exit whilst the machine is printing or awaiting printing it is possible to display the Status menu screen Press Status Left Select The Status menu screen appears The following operations are possible on the Status menu screen Job Status 6 3 Job Log 6 4 USB Keyboard 6 5 Network 6 5 Option Network 6 5 Wireless Network 6 6 Note USB Keyboard is only displayed when a USB keyboard is N connected Option Network is only displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit IB 50 is installed Wireless Network is only displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 is installed 6 2 Status Menu Job Status It is possible to check the status of jobs printing or awaiting printing In addit
2. 3 Press A or V to select Quick Copy Jobs and press OK The Quick Copy Jobs screen appears 4 Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the maximum number of Quick Copy jobs Quick Copy Jobs m 0 300 EA job s 5 Press OK The setting is stored and the Job Box Setting menu reappears JobRet Deletion Set Automatic Delete times for Temporary Jobs When the set period passes the temporary jobs are automatically deleted 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Job Box Setting 2 Press OK The Job Box Setting screen appears Job Box Setting Mm JobRet Deletion Storage Media Exit 3 Press A or V to select JobRet Deletion and press OK The JobRet Deletion screen appears 5 28 Document Box 4 Press or V to select the desired Automatic Delete time The list shows the following times JobRet Deletion M i hour Off automatic delete is not performed 4 hours 1 hour deleted in 1 hour 4 hours deleted in 4 hours 1 day deleted on the next day 1 week deleted after one week 5 Press OK The setting is stored and the Job Box Setting menu reappears Storage Media Selecting the storage media for the jobs If the optional SSD and SD card are both installed it is possible to select which storage media to use Note After this setting has been done turn the machine OFF and ON again This is mandatory to make the amp settings effec
3. n 2 6 Installing SoftWare 2 7 SUS MONO ee 2 14 Command GeMet RA orisa 2 18 POWER ORIN PAE E AA EE 2 25 Energy S ver FUP GU 0 A 2 26 Loading Papel us iiice cumin erase adian I SEDI ara e iN MM c IU EINE EUN PN asioi ii 2 28 2 1 Preparation before Use Changing Network Interface Parameters This printer supports TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 IPP SSL Server and the IPSec protocols and Security Level The table below shows the items required for each of the settings Configure the printer s network parameters as appropriate for your PC and your network environment Menu Submenu Setting Network TCP IP Settings TCP IP On Off IPv4 Setting DHCP On Off Auto IP On Off IP Address IP address Subnet Mask IP address Default Gateway IP address Bonjour On Off IPv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 On Off RA Stateless On Off DHCPv6 On Off Protocol Detail NetBEUI On Off SNMPv3 On Off FTP Server On Off SNMP On Off SMTP On Off POP3 On Off RAW Port On Off LPD On Off HTTP On Off LDAP On Off Restart Network Yes No 2 2 Preparation before Use Menu Submenu Setting Security Network Secu
4. Inthe User Login Set menu press A or V to select PIN Login Press OK The PIN Login screen appears Press A or V to select On or Of f Press OK The User Login Set menu reappears 4 115 Operation Panel Login Logout Once you enable user login administration a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine Enter the user information registered on the network authentication server as the login user name and password Register new users from the KYOCERA Net Manager For details refer to the KYOCERA Net Manager Install Manual Note To carry out operations restricted in the mode selection menu operation and Lock Operation Panel settings J itis necessary to log in as a user with administrator authority For the administrator settings refer to Administrator on page 4 117 For Lock Operation Panel refer to Command Center RX User Guide Login Use the procedure below to login 1 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name entry screen is displayed Login User Name wi Login Password Menu Login 2 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears f Note For details on entering characters refer to Character amp Entry Method on page A 2 n Login User Name mMm ABC Text 3 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Login U
5. 1 Inthe Network menu press A or V to select Restart Network 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Restarting Please wait appears and the network is restarted Pressing No Right Select returns to the Network menu without restarting the network 4 64 Operation Panel Optional Network Optional Network settings This selects the settings for the optional Network Interface Kit IB 50 or Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 Note This is only displayed when a Network Interface Kit IB 50 or Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 is installed as an option The options available in the Optional Network settings are as follows Wireless Network Wireless network settings 4 66 Basic Basic settings for the optional Network Interface Kit 4 72 Communication Select the network interface to use 4 75 Note Check with your network administrator when selecting the network setting After all network related settings amp have been done restart the network Refer to Restart Network Restarting the optional Network Interface Kit on page 4 74 This is mandatory to make the settings effective When the web page for IB 50 or IB 51 is used network parameters and security settings can be conveniently changed and checked from your PC For more information refer to the B 50 IB 51 User s Manual 1 Press Menu 2 Press A or V to select Optional Netw
6. Unknown ID Job mm 1 Reject Permit 11 Press OK The Unknown ID Job screen appears Reject Not printed Permit Printed 12 Press A or V to select a setting and then press OK The User Job Account menu list reappears 4 129 Operation Panel Adjust Maint Adjust Maintenance selection setting Adjust Maintenance is used to adjust the print quality and to carry out printer maintenance The options available in Adjust Maintenance are as follows Quiet Mode Setting the Quiet Mode 4 130 Restart Restart Printer 4 131 Service Setting for Maintenance 4 132 IMPORTANT service Settingis primarily a menu used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu 1 Press Menu 2 Press A or V to select Adjust Maint 3 Press OK The Adjust Maint menu appears showing a list of available options Adjust Maint mm Quiet Mode Restart Service Setting Exit Quiet Mode Setting the Quiet Mode Lower print speed for quiet processing Options available in Quiet Mode are as follows Quiet Mode Selecting the Quiet Mode 4 130 Each Job Permission for settings for each jobs 4 131 1 Inthe Adjust Maint menu screen press A or V to select Quiet Mode 2 Press OK The Quiet Mode menu appears showing a list of available options Quiet Mode U Quiet Mode Each Job Exit Quie
7. 2 Press OK The Destination menu appears Destination pad OK Confirmation Address Entry Address Entry Entering an e mail address Enter the destination to which log histories are sent 1 Inthe Destination menu press A or V to select Address Entry 2 Press OK The Address Entry screen appears Address Entry m ABC Text 3 Enter the address using the numeric keys Note Up to 128 characters can be entered For details on amp N entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 Press OK Register the destination and the Job Log History menu reappears If the destination has already been registered the message Dest is already registered Do you want to overwrite appears Press Yes Left Select to overwrite the destination Pressing No Right Select returns to the Destination menu without overwriting the destination Confirmation Checking and editing the destination Check and edit the registered destination 1 Inthe Destination menu press A or V to select Confirmation 2 Press OK The Dest Confirm screen appears Check the destination Dest Confirm Ui taaaQbbb com Exit Operation Panel 3 To edit the destination press OK Ey aaa bbb com m Edit Delete 4 Press A or V to select Edit 5 Press OK Address Entry Ui aaa bbb comi 6 Enter the ad
8. llle A 18 Labels sut s odutentar ep a ARR E ORB ERAS A 22 Loading envelopes llllllllssn 2 34 Loading paper into the cassette 2 28 Loading paper into the MP tray 2 32 Mediatyp uot px eer s 4 31 4 37 Minimum and maximum paper sizes A 17 Other paper properties 0000 A 20 Paper availability llle A 16 Paper sizes 4 30 4 32 4 34 A 18 Paper thickness 00000 0c cece eee 4 37 Postcards c cotes eee nd alee et A 23 Preprinted paper 0000 cece eee A 24 Recycled paper 000 c cece eee eens A 24 Resets customized settings 0005 4 40 Sp ciall paper 2 i solem me x oe ees A 21 AMICK paper cc 2 54 usc ueni s Baan a naras A 24 Transparency 0 eee A 21 Paper Cassette Clearing paper jams sss 8 18 Loading paper 0 0 e eee eee 2 28 Non standard paper size 0 05 4 34 Paper feed source 000 c cece eee ees 4 41 Paper SIZE nsir eiam sain naw eden EAS RC E 4 33 Paper type erostari esaet aps zoe cos Cx RP ee 4 33 Standard paper size 0000 0c eee 4 32 Paper Feed Mode sisse te 4 43 Paper Feeder o ccris sitie paaria Ag Sauer eR s A 9 Clearing paper jams lle 8 18 Loading paper 23 22g iil be aee eae 2 28 Paper feed source 000 c cece eee ees 4 41 Paper size sonsaina dae ha Bhs 4 32 4 33 4
9. Operation Guide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic print operations and troubleshooting Command Center RX User Guide Describes how to access the machine from a computer via a Web browser to check and change settings Printer Driver User Guide Describes how to install the printer driver and use printer functionality KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide Describes how to use functionality for printing PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide Describes how to monitor the network printing system with KYOCERA Net Viewer Card Authentication Kit B Operation Guide Describes how to authenticate to the machine using the ID card Data Security Kit E Operation Guide Describes how to install and configure the Data Security Kit PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Describes the native printer language PRESCRIBE commands PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference Describes PRESCRIBE command functionality and control for each type of emulation Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient atte
10. Send the job log history Are you sure Yes No Enter Destination 8 Press OK The Auto Sending menu appears When Auto Sending is set to On in step 5 the setting for Jobs is displayed 9 Press A or V to select Jobs 10 Press OK The Jobs screen appears 1 1 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to specify the number of job log histories 12 Press OK The setting is stored and the Job Log History menu reappears Send History Sending job log history You can also send the job log history to the specified destination manually Set the destinations in advance by referring to Destination Setting the destination on page 4 18 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press A or V to select Send History 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed This message appears if no destination has been set 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted appears and the printer sends the job log history Pressing No Right Select returns to the Job Log History menu without sending the job log history Operation Panel Destination Setting the destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent Only E mail address can be set The options available in the Destination menu are as follows Address Entry Entering an e mail address 4 18 Confirmation Checking and editing the destination 4 18 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press A or V to select Destination
11. eere 4 110 Adjust Maint Adjust Maintenance selection setting eene 4 130 Op Functions Optional application settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeenreeeeen nnne nnne 4 133 4 1 Operation Panel Message Display Messages indicating the status of the various printer operations are displayed on the message display Status Information Message Meaning Please wait The printer is warming up and is not ready When the printer is switched on for the first time this message will take several minutes Please wait Loading paper The paper in the cassette is being moved to a position where paper feed is possible This message is sometimes displayed for a short period when the cassette is returned to its original position for example after paper is added Please wait Adding toner Toner is currently being replenished This message may be displayed during continuous printing of a large volume of pages which require a large amount of toner such as with photographs etc Ready to print The printer is ready to print Processing The printer is receiving data to print This is also shown when the printer is reading an SD card USB memory SSD or RAM disk Canceling Jobs inside the printer are being canceled To cancel a job refer to Canceling a Printing Job on page 4 4 Error Codes For information on error code and errors wher
12. To change the E mail Address Detail KES Un REjE mailAddress 4 5 Edit 10 11 12 13 Press lor gt to select Login User Name Pressing Edit Right Select The screen for editing the Login User Name appears Change the Login User Name using the numeric keys and press OK The Login User Name screen reappears Note Up to 32 characters can be entered For details on amp entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press lor gt to select Login Password Pressing Edit Right Select The New Password screen appears Enter the new password using the numeric keys and press OK The Confirm Password screen reappears Note Up to 64 characters can be entered For details on amp N entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 To confirm re enter the password to be registered Enter the Password using the numeric keys Press OK If the Password matches then the password is changed to the new one and the Login Password screen reappears Ifthe password does not match Incorrect passwordis displayed and the New Password screen reappears Enter again from the new Password Press lt or gt to select E mailAddress 4 118 Operation Panel 14 Pressing Edit Right Select The Address Entry screen appears Address Entry Ok ABC Text 15 Change the address using the nume
13. Press OK The USB Storage screen appears Press A or V to select whether to block and protect the USB memory Press OK The USB memory setting is set and the I F Block Set menu reappears The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu 4 106 Operation Panel Data Security Data Security setting This is to change the Security Password initialize on optional SSD and sanitizing the stored data SSD Initializ SSD Initialization setting 4 107 DataSanitization Sanitizing the stored data 4 109 Note SSD Initializ is displayed only when the optional SSD and Data Security Kit are installed 1 Inthe security menu press A or V toselect Data Security 2 Press OK The Data Security menu screen appears Data Security Ui SSD Initializ DataSanitization Exit SSD Initializ SSD Initialization setting This is to change the Security Password and initialize on optional SSD Security Passwd Change the Security Password 4 108 Initialization Initialize on optional SSD 4 108 1 Inthe Data Security menu press A or V to select SSD Initializ 2 Press OK The SecurityPassword entry screen appears SecurityPassword gt Mm ABC Text 3 Enter the Security Password using the numeric keys Note The initial setting for the Security Pa
14. Press A or V to select On or Of f Press OK The Auto File Del menu screen reappears Note If on has been selected set the number of days for amp storage as the Period Period is only displayed if it has been set to On Press A or V to select Period Press OK The Period screen appears Enter the number of days for storage using the numeric keys A or V 10 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears 1 3 4 1 This setting is used to permit or prohibit the overwriting of old documents that have been stored for the storage of new In the Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Overwrite Set Press Change Right Select The Overwrite Set screen appears Press A or V to select Permit or Prohibit Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears Del afterPrint Setting for file deletion after printing This automatically deletes the documents from the Boxes when the printing is complete In the Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Del afterPrint Document Box 2 Press Change Right Select The Del afterPrint screen Del after Print Mm appears 03 off PP On 3 Press A or V to select On or Off 4 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears Editing and Deleting Custom Boxes It is possible to change the detailed settings of the Custom Boxes and to delete Boxes 1 Inthe custom Box list screen press A or V to select the Box to edit
15. Printed user name Pages printed User name Page s No of pages us sd Copies completed Copies specified t The display differs depending on the countries or regions 1 Inthe status menu press A or V to select Job Log 0005 0004 Job Log 0006 P ABCDEFGHIJ OK Dyabcdefghij OK 140123456789 jM Detail A lt gt v 2 Press OK Job Log is displayed along with the job numbers of completed jobs and a list of the job names The job type and result for each job are also shown as icons Status Menu 3 Press or V to select the name of the job whose details you want to view 4 Press Detail Right Select The Detail screen appears 0006 Detail KES Uni Job Name 1 6 The detailed job log covers 6 pages in all Press gt to view to the next ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST page or lt to return to the previous page Pressing OK returns you to the Job Log menu Detail If the entire name shown as the Job Name will not fit on one line Detail pressing Detail Right Select changes to a 3 line name ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTU display VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 USB Keyboard When a USB keyboard is attached it is possible to check whether the USB keyboard can be used 1 Inthe status menu press A or V to select USB Keyboard 2 Press OK If the USB keyboard is available for use Available is displayed USB K
16. Settings icon Expand button Alert Tab Toner Status Tab Paper Tray Status Tab Printing Progress Tab Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab 2 14 Preparation before Use Printing Progress Tab Printed Status f TEST bt Note 07 1 1 Comple Status icon Job list Paper Tray Status Tab ae 0 30 com Se a Name Size Type A MP Tray Plain Cassettel Ad Plain Toner Level Name Black 99 Alert Tab a ec 13 The printing system s top cover is open Close it securely Cover open The status of the print jobs is displayed Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right click Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining The amount of toner remaining is displayed If an error occurs a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message 2 15 Preparation before Use Status Monitor Context Menu The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked uh coo c 9 oo FREE px e Settings icon i d me Command Center RX 9 30 2956 a Notification Ready www kyoceradocumentsolutions com Exit Command Center RX If the printer is connected to a TCP IP network and has its own IP address use a web browser to
17. Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement vi Energy Saving Control Function To reduce energy
18. dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint This is a printing mode that reduces toner consumption Pages printed in the EcoPrint mode are lighter than pages printed in the normal mode Glossary 1 Glossary Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages Form Feed Timeout While data is being sent to a printer some pauses may occur At this time the printer waits for the next data without making a page break Form feed timeout is a function to wait only a preset amount of time before it executes an automatic page break After the waiting period begins once the designated amount of time is exceeded the printer will automatically process the currently received data and print it out If the machine has received no print data for the last page the printer ends processing of that job without outputting paper IP Address Internet Protocol Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view we
19. menu screen without restarting the printer Yes No 4 131 Operation Panel Service Setting for Maintenance IMPORTANT Service Setting is primarily a menu used by service personnel for maintenance work Item Description Value Service Status The service status page contains printer settings information that is more detailed than the standard status page and is therefore mostly for service purposes However there is a great deal of information on the service status page that may be useful to you Yes No Network Status The network status page contains detailed information on the network settings This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel but it contains information that may also be useful to you Yes No Op Netwk Status The option network status page contains detailed information on the network settings This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel but it contains information that may also be useful to you Note The Op Netwk Status menuis only displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit IB 50 or Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 is installed Yes No Test Page The test page is printed to check the effectiveness of printer adjustments This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel but it contains information that may also be useful to you Yes No Maintenance This specifies the setting for confirmati
20. space 0 Ld Numeric 0 Laen Alphabetic Symbol Switch between upper lowercase Numeric period Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively To enter a character associated with the same key after another use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there spaces are automatically entered in between Entering Symbols Press Text Right Select to display the Symbols screen Use cursor keys to select the symbol you want to enter and then press OK Note The symbols that can be entered for the function are displayed Pset 0 11 7 0 UE fud R ea CER PIS O o2 G t 3 q 1 Text Symbols Uni A 4 Appendix About the Options This printer has the following options available to satisfy your printing requirements For instructions on installing individual options refer to the documentation included with the option Some options are explained in the following sections i p a E oyr lt P J mo o Expansion Memory SD Memory Card i i 1SDHC Memory Card USB Flash Memory Network Interface Kit SSD 1B 50 HD 6 HD 7 Wireless Network Parallel Interface Kit Interface Kit IB 51 IB 32 Software option Data Security Kit E UG 33 Appendix
21. 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 brackets Press the power switch to turn off and then press it again to turn on If this Error occurred message still remains press the power switch to turn off and contact your Turn the power service representative switch off and on HEEFT An error occurred when obtaining user information after the authentication Log Failed to get the in again network user information Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action File was deleted Check the document box The file or box selected does not exist Check that the box has not been deleted or that the file has not been deleted or moved Format SD card The SD card inserted in the printer is not formatted and therefore cannot be read or written To format an SD card follow the procedure in Format SD Card Formatting the SD card on page 4 84 Format SSD The SSD inserted in the printer is not formatted and therefore cannot be read or written To format an SSD follow the procedure in Format SSD Formatting the SSD on page 4 84 Incorrect account ID The Account ID does not match Check the registered Account ID For more information refer to Job Account Set Job Account setting on page 4 121 Press OK Incorrect account ID This message is displayed when the Job Accounting function is enabled and no account is set for a tran
22. Enable user login administration page 4 112 v Add a user on the network server v Log out page 4 117 v The registered user logs in for operations page 4 116 1 Press Menu 2 Press A or V to select User Job Account 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name Wi Note When user login administration is set Login Password When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is l not displayed and the User Job Account menu screen Login is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator A 4 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name 0 Login User Name entry screen is displayed ABC Text 4 110 Operation Panel Login User Name OK 4000 Login Password SS Login Password Ui Login User Name OK 4000 Login Password C User Job Account M Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit User Login Set m User Login Local User List Exit Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Name is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press A or V to select the Login Password entr
23. Magnification ra MP Tray tio Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope Monarch Envelope 6 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 R B4 B5 R B6 R Oficio Il 216 x 340 mm Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement Executive 8K 16K Folio ISO B5 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom 20 to 50096 196 increments Printing Speeds Simplex A4 40 ppm A3 22 ppm B4 25 ppm A4 R 27 ppm B5 R 33 ppm A5 R 40 ppm A6 R 33 ppm B5 40 ppm A5 40 ppm Duplex A4 28 ppm A3 11 ppm B4 12 5 ppm A4 R 18 9 ppm B5 R 23 1 ppm A5 R 28 ppm B5 28 ppm First Print Time Cassette A4 feed from 7 5 seconds or less Warm up Time 22 C 60 RH Power On 18 seconds or less Sleept 18 seconds or less A 26 Appendix Item Description Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m MP Tray 100 sheets A4 80 g m 20 sheets A3 80 g m Output Tray Top Tray 500 sheets A4 80 g m 450 sheets A3 80 g m Capacity Face up Tray 250 sheets A4 80 g m Continuous printing 1 to 999 sheets Resolution Fine 1200 mode Fast 1200 mode 600 dpi 300 dpi Operation Environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Relative Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 2 500 m 8 202 feet maximum Illumination 1 500 lux maximum Controller PowerPC465 ARM7 ARM9 Operating
24. Press OK The Size Entry X menu screen appears Use the numeric keys or A or V to enter the paper width The range of paper widths you can set for each cassette is as follows Cassette 105 to 297 mm 4 13 to 11 69 inches Paper Feeder PF 4100 148 to 297 mm 5 83 to 11 69 inches Press OK The entered paper width is set and the Custom PaperSize menu screen reappears Pressing Exit Right Select returns to the Ready to print screen To set the paper type for the paper cassette refer to Media Type Setting the cassette paper type on page 4 33 4 36 Operation Panel Media Type Set Paper type settings You can set the paper thickness by selecting a paper weight This allows you to set the paper thickness for each of the media types that can be used on the printer And for custom paper registered in the printer up to 8 you can specify paper thickness and whether duplex printing is permitted For the procedure for registering custom paper sizes refer to Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size on page 4 35 For normal settings refer to Setting the Paper Thickness on page 4 37 For custom paper settings refer to Custom Paper Settings on page 4 38 The options available in Media Type Set menu are as follows Setting the Paper Thickness 4 37 Custom Paper Settings 4 38 Setting the Paper Thickness You can set the paper thickness by selecting a paper weight The available paper weig
25. ea 2 4 6 5 7 8 Printing Printer Driver Help The printer driver includes Help To learn more about print settings display the printer driver print settings screen and display Help using either of the methods explained below 2 1 Click the button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to know about s uem Click the item you want to know about and press the F1 key on your he E keyboard T Imaging E Pubiishing o 8 Job Advanced Factory Save Asn _ Profiles Print previe w ok cel Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings Windows 7 The default printer driver settings can be changed By selecting frequently used settings you can omit steps when printing For the settings refer to Printer Driver User Guide Click start button on the Windows and then click Devices and Printers Right click the printer driver icon of the machine and click Printer properties menu of the printer driver 3 Click Preferences on the General tab 4 Select the default settings and click OK Printing Printing Functions This section explains the useful functions which can be set with the Printer Driver For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide Half Speed Mode Printer Driver Settings Half speed mode reduces the print speed to half the rated speed When selected the toner adhe
26. Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During printing some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when printing an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for print work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Interface connectors IMPORTANT Be sure to power off the printer before connecting or disconnecting an interface cable For protection against static electricity discharge to the printer s internal electronics through the interface connector s cover any interface connector that is not in use with the protective cap supplied Note Use shielded interface cables viii Cautions when Handling Consumables Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner Dangerous sparks may cause burns S Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner avoid inhalation and ingestion as well as contact with your S eyes and skin f you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a p
27. Connection Mode 7 Md OK 02 Infrastructure Channel Channel settings 1 2 In the Custom Setup menu press A or V to select Connection Mode Press OK The Connection Mode screen appears The available Connection Mode are as follows Ad Hoc Connect without going through access points Infrastructure Connect via an access point Press A or V to select the connection mode Press OK The Custom Setup menu reappears This sets the Channel to be used in the wireless network Channel CL XL E g 1 2 In the Custom Setup menu press A or V to select Channel Press OK The Channel screen appears 4 69 Operation Panel 3 Enter the Channel number using the numeric keys A or V Note The Channel can be set between 1 and 11 4 Press OK The Custom Setup menu reappears Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting This sets the authentication method to be used when connecting to an access point k Note You can also configure the network authentication setting for WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise using SS the web page of the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 For details refer to the B 51 User s Manual 1 Inthe custom Setup menu press A or V to select Netwk Authentic 2 Press OK The Netwk Authentic screen appears Netwk Authentic 0m The available authentication methods are as follows Shared Open wea oE Shared WPA P
28. Firmware version Operation Panel Status Page Printing a printer s status page You can check the printer s current status and option settings by printing a status page Print Are you sure Status Page Yes No Understanding the Status Page 1 Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select Status Page 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted appears and the printer prints the status page Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu without printing the status page The numbers in the following diagram refer the items explained below the diagram The items and values on the status page may vary depending on the printer s firmware version Status Page Printer Firmware version Paper Settings Group Settings Print Settings EcoPrint Device Common Settings Option Status Network KYOCERA Memory Emulation gum e Toner Gauge 10 FEc sis Operation Panel Firmware Version This item shows the version and release date of the printer firmware Printer Settings Information This item shows various printer settings for hardware related items MP tray
29. Operation Panel Date Setting Date and time settings Set the date and time IMPORTANT To change the Date Setting the administrator s Login User Name and Login Password must be entered For details of the administrator settings refer to Administrator on page 4 117 If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application The date and time settings consist of the following items Date date setting 4 79 Time time setting 4 79 Date Format date format selection 4 79 Time Zone time difference setting 4 80 Summer Time summer time setting 4 80 Login User Name Login Password 0 E Login Login User Name ABC Text n oa OK Login User Name 4000 Login Password Login Login Password ABC Text 7 oa OK B In the Device Common menu press A or V to select Date Setting Press OK The Login screen appears Note When user login administration is set When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Date Setting menu screen is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name entry screen is displayed Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys the
30. 4 This button is used to select multiple items If the target device is not displayed press this button to directly select the device to be used 2 9 Preparation before Use Instal devices and utilities TETEA EL a aia Quem JUI acumen Read manuals and readme elo devices selected file 328s Soe sums E 2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc Install devices and utilities stat 2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Ine Move the items te the Producto Install list Qs Products to Install Siteme Elle GB 2 m goce GR Seems EE ET ou KYOCERA Net Direct Pint Name KXDRIYER OPS DRIVER v i iver RC sums zi F use host name as port name ar Er eani cee Do eu es 8 Finished Your software is ready to use details Product Detail KX DRIVER Installed KYOCERA Net Viewer Installed Status Monitor Installed dd Print a test page 3 Vif Enable event notification amp Vidi Show Quick Print tab Select the device to be installed and driver to be installed and then click the arrow button to move it to the Products to Install list Select the utility to be installed and then click the arrow button to move it to the Products to Install list ZI Note To install Statu
31. 8 Push down on the top of the toner container to install it firmly in place Lee lever 9 Turn the lock lever to the lock position 7 5 Maintenance 10 Close the top cover Note If the top cover top tray does not close check that the amp new toner container is installed correctly in step 7 After use always dispose of the toner container and the waste toner box in accordance with Federal State and Local rules and regulations Proceed to the next section Maintenance Replacing the Waste Toner Box Replace the waste toner box when the Waste toner box is full message is displayed and when replacing the toner container A new waste toner box is included with the toner kit The waste toner box needs to be replaced before the printer will operate A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the Toner Container Dangerous sparks may cause burns 1 Open the left cover 2 While holding the waste toner box press the lock lever and then gently remove the waste toner box Note Remove the waste toner box as gently as possible so amp as not to scatter the toner inside Do not let the opening of the waste toner box face downward Lock Lever 3 Close the cap to the old waste toner box after removing the box from the printer 4 To prevent toner from spilling put the old waste toner box in the plastic bag contained in the toner kit and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for wast
32. Expansion Memory Modules The printer s main controller board has a memory slot into which you can plug in optional memory modules dual in line memory modules You can increase the printer s memory up to 1280 MB by plugging in the optional memory modules Note A 256 MB memory module is already installed at the factory To expand memory up to 1280 MB install N 1024 MB memory module Expansion Memory Modules You can select additional memory modules from 256 512 or 1024 MB Precautions for Handling the Printer s Main Controller Board and Memory Modules To protect electronic parts discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe faucet or other large metal object before handling the memory modules Or wear an antistatic wrist strap if possible when you install the memory modules amp Installing the Memory Modules 1 Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord 2 Open the rear cover and remove the interface cover and power cord connector cover 3 Unscrew five screws at the back of the main controller board A 6 Appendix 4 Pull out the main controller board gently 5 Remove the memory module from its package Aligning the cutouts of the memory module with the matching keys of the socket carefully plug the memory module into the memory socket until it clicks in place A CAUTION Do not plug the memory module backwards 6 Push down the memory module to secur
33. List menu appears showing a list of the registered accounts in ascending order Account List m 00000001 ee 00000002 ee 00000003 ada on 3 Press A or V to select an account to check or edit and then press 2 amp 00000001 n OK A list of selection options appears etal i Delete Exit 4 Press A or V to select Detail Edit and then press OK The Detail Edit menu screen appears Detail Edit Ui Account ID Print Restrict 4 125 Operation Panel 5 To edit an account ID press A or V to select Account ID and then press OK The Account ID menu screen appears Account ID OK 00000001y 6 Use the numeric keys to enter the new account ID 7 Press OK When account ID editing has been completed the Detail Edit menu screen appears Detail Edit Ui Account ID Print Restrict This message appears if the account ID has already been registered This account ID is already registered 8 To place printing restrictions on this account press A or V to select brint Restrict Hl Print Restrict and then press OK L3 oit The Print Restrict screen appears Counter Limit Reject Usage Off e Counter Limit e Reject Usage 9 Press A or V to select a setting and then press OK When the setting has been completed the Detail Edit menu screen appears Detail Edit m Account ID Print Restrict
34. Use the procedure below to specify whether duplex printing is permitted with custom paper 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V toselect Media Type Set 2 Press OK The Media Type Set screen appears listing the Media Type Set e media types that can used with the printer Plain Transparency Preprinted Exit 3 Press or V to select the custom paper CUSTOM 1 to 8 for which you want to set the duplex printing permission 4 Press OK A menu for the selected media is displayed CUSTOM 1 m Paper Weight Duplex Name Entry 5 Press or V to select Duplex 6 Press OK The Duplex screen appears listing the paper weights that can used with the printer Duplex Sard OK Prohibit 7 Press A or V to specify whether duplex printing is permitted 8 Press OK The duplex printing permission is set and the custom paper screen reappears Use the procedure below to register the name to be displayed for the custom paper 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V toselect Media Type Set 2 Press OK The Media Type Set screen appears listing the Se ee 0r media types that can used with the printer Plain Transparency Preprinted Exit 3 Press or V to select the custom paper CUSTOM 1 to 8 for which you want to register a name to display 4 39 Operation Panel CUSTOM 1 m Duplex Name Entry Exit N
35. WEP Key settings This registers the WEP Key WEP Key m LER ERE LEE SE Edit WEP Key PE OK rrr A ABC Text Preshared Key Preshared Key settings This registers the Preshared Key Preshared Key mm LER ERE LEE SE Edit Preshared Key m scassscccce i ABC Text Press OK The Data Encryption screen appears Note The encryption methods that can be selected vary SV depending on the authentication method set in Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting on page 4 70 Disable or WEP can be selected when Open or Shared is set TKIP AES or Auto can be selected when WPA PSK is set AES can be selected when WPA2 PSK is set Press A or V to select the desired encryption method Press OK The Encryption menu reappears In the Encryption menu press A or V to select WEP Key Press OK The WEP Key screen appears Press Edit Right Select The WEP Key entry screen appears Enter the WEP Key using the numeric keys Note Up to 26 characters can be entered For details on amp entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press OK The Encryption menu reappears In the Encryption menu press A or V to select Preshared Key Press OK The Preshared Key screen appears Press Edit Right Select The Preshared Key entry screen appears 4 71 Operati
36. information Images with no resolution information are printed using the Paper Size setting Print Resolution Images are printed using a 1 to 1 correspondence between the image file pixels and printed dots For example the printed size of a 600 x 300 pixel image file is 1 inch x 1 2 inch Press A or V to select whether TIFF JPEG Size mode is enabled Press OK The TIFF JPEG Size setting is set and the Page Setting menu reappears Note Images are automatically rotated during printing to SV provide a closer match between the aspect ratios of the image file and the paper used for printing User Name The User Name display settings Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed User Name m Off 1 2 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select User Name Press OK The User Name screen appears Press or V to select On or Off Press OK The User Name setting is set and the Print Settings menu reappears Job Name The Job Name display settings Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed Job Name Ui Off 02 Job Name Job No Job Name 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Job Name 2 Press OK The Job Name screen appears The options available in Job Name are as follows Off Job Name Use the job name set in the printer driver Job No Job Name Job Name Job No Press A or V to select the desired
37. 0 0 0 0 eee ee 5 30 Private print uoc cece Gee ee pane TEMERE 5 25 Proof and Hold 020000 eee eee 5 22 Quick COPY iussum Ue ee eee ee iaa 5 22 Stored JOb iu emn de anew mess hen eae 5 25 K Key Back key 4 serrer 1 5 4 4 Cancel key seg ort eid bea he 1 5 4 4 Clear Ky xx saad Pret repre 1 5 4 5 Document Box key 20000005 1 5 4 5 Left Select key 0 000000 00 1 5 4 6 Logout key eee 1 5 4 4 Menu key 0 0 cece eee eee 1 5 4 4 OKI K6Y eee DE Dt te deste 1 5 4 5 Right Select key 00000005 1 5 4 6 Arrow Keys cce cee ee eee ee 1 5 4 5 Numeric Keys 000 eee eee eee 1 5 4 5 KIR ete oestrone acpec soi cas eee eaten 4 50 L Labels oiean aae drean ena eee eee A 22 Einelti o e M ede LIDReRIS Re Erasm 4 76 Left Cover 0 0000 cece le 1 2 M Machine Parts liliis 1 1 Maintenance 200020 eee eee 4 130 7 1 Quiet mode 00 00 cee eee 4 130 crc 1 5 3 Seite DTE 4 131 Memory Checking expansion memory 00000 A 8 Expansion memory lellllee ess A 6 Installation llle A 6 REMOVE T DIEM A 7 Message Display 0 00 c eee ee eee 1 5 4 2 L ngiage zur e LI eid bed be ede age 4 76 Online help messages 2200000005 8 17 Status information 0000020 cee eee 4 2 Mode Selection Menu 20000202000 4 9 Moving Printet cmm c
38. 10 Sorting the Custom Box list 5 11 Searching Custom Boxes 5 11 Setting automatic document deletion for Custom Boxes 5 12 Note The creation and setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from Command Center RX For more information refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Custom Box creation Create a Custom Box Enter the Box Name and Box Number then it is possible to continue on and set the details of the Box Note When user login administration is enabled log in as a user with administrator authority 1 Inthe custom Box list screen press Add Right Select The Box Name Entry Screen appears Z Box Name Entry Ui ABC Text 2 Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys j Note Up to 32 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 3 Press OK The Box Number Entry screen appears Box Number Entry m 0001 1000 4 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the Box Number Note Enter the Box Number as a four digit number from 0001 SS 1000 5 Press OK Box 01 Ui Exit Detail 6 Press A or V to select Detail or Exit then press OK To set the details of the Box select Detail and proceed to Detailed box settings on page 5 5 If the details of the Box will not be set then select Exit and finish the operation Document Box Detailed b
39. 200000001 m s Printed Pages Counter Reset menu screen appears si Counter Reset 4 Press or V to select Printed Pages 5 Press OK The Printed Pages menu list screen appears Printed Pages ow Total 300000 Combine None 200000 Combine 2in1 100000 6 Press A or V to check the required counter display 7 Press OK The Printed Pages Counter Reset menu screen reappears Each Job Account Counter Reset Totals reset by account Resets the number of pages printed for each of the accounts currently set Note Before carrying out this operation register the Account in the Account List Account List operation on page SSVI 4 124 1 Inthe account Local menu press A or V to select Each Job Account 2 Press OK The Each Job Account menu appears with the accounts with the highest numbers listed first Each Job Account 0 00000002 00000003 3 Press A or V to select an account and then press OK The 00000001 m eae Printed Pages Counter Reset menu screen appears rinte ages Counter Reset 4 Press A or V to select Counter Reset 5 Press OK The reset confirmation menu screen appears Reset counter Are you sure To proceed with resetting the counter press Yes Left Select gt 00000001 Completed appears the counter is reset and the Printed Pages Counter Reset menu reappears 78S sis Pressing No Right Select ret
40. 4 13 to 11 69 inches Paper Feeder PF 4100 148 to 297 mm 5 83 to 11 69 inches 1 Inthe cassette 4 Set menu press A or V to select Custom Cassette 1 Set 0m PaperSize Media Type Other Paper Size shows the number of the cassette installed in the printer 1 to 5 Custom PaperSize Exit 2 Press OK The Custom PaperSize menu screen appears Custom PaperSize M Size Entry Y Size Entry X Exit 3 Press or V to select Measurement 4 35 Operation Panel 4 Measurement TU inch 5 6 7 Size Entry Y lt 0 148 432 432 mm 8 9 10 11 Size Entry X lt 0 105 297 297 1m 12 13 14 Media Type Setting the cassette paper type Press OK The Measurement menu screen appears Press or V to select the paper size units and then press OK The unit for entering the paper size is set and the Custom PaperSize menu screen reappears Press A or V to select Size Entry Y Press OK The Size Entry Y menu screen appears Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the paper length The range of paper lengths you can set for each cassette is as follows Cassette 148 to 432 mm 5 83 to 17 00 inches Paper Feeder PF 4100 210 to 432 mm 8 27 to 17 00 inches Press OK The entered paper length is set and the Custom PaperSize menu screen reappears Press A or V to select Size Entry X
41. 653 1256 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B V Beechavenue 25 1119 RA Schiphol Rijk The Netherlands Phone 31 20 5877200 Fax 31 20 5877260 KYOCERA Document Solutions U K Limited Eldon Court 75 77 London Road Reading Berkshire RG1 5BS United Kingdom Phone 44 118 931 1500 Fax 44 118 931 1108 KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S p A Via Verdi 89 91 20063 Cernusco s N MI Italy Phone 39 02 921791 Fax 39 02 92179 600 KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N V Sint Martinusweg 199 201 1930 Zaventem Belgium Phone 32 2 7209270 Fax 32 2 7208748 KYOCERA Document Solutions France S A S Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de l Orme 91195 Gif sur Yvette CEDEX France Phone 33 1 69852600 Fax 33 1 69853409 KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana S A Edificio Kyocera Avda de Manacor No 2 28290 Las Matas Madrid Spain Phone 34 91 6318392 Fax 34 91 6318219 KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy Atomitie 5C 00370 Helsinki Finland Phone 358 9 47805200 Fax 358 9 47805390 KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Amsterdam NL Ziirich Branch Hohlstrasse 614 8048 Z rich Switzerland Phone 41 44 9084949 Fax 41 44 9084950 KYOCERA Document Solutions Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Strasse 12 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 9180 Fax 49 2159 918100 ii D i Y i KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH Eduard Kitte
42. Counter Limit 10 when counter Limitis setforPrint Restrict in step 9 set Counce dE peg OK the limit on the total number of pages that can be printed using this account Press A or V to select Counter Limit and then press EZE 22sec OK The Counter Limit menu screen appears IMPORTANT Counter Limit is displayed when Counter Limit is setfor Print Restrict 11 Use the numeric keys or or V to enter the limit you want to set for Detail Edit lt 0 this account After you have entered the limit on the number of pages Account TH press OK The setting is stored and the Detail Edit menu Print Restrict reappears Counter Limit PP Delete Deleting registered accounts You can use this procedure to delete a registered account ID 1 Inthe Account Local menu press A or V to select Account List 4 126 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The Account List menu appears showing a list of gO MR DS the registered accounts in ascending order Se 00000001 se 00000002 f 00000003 3 Press or V to select the ID of the account to be deleted 4 Press OK A list of selection options appears 2 amp 00000001 Pad OK Detail Edit Delete Exit 5 Press A or V to select Delete and then press OK A confirmation screen appears 200000001 Yes No 6 To proceed with deleting the account press Yes Left Select sa aeS 0
43. Custom Box i or delete 60002 Box 02 0003 Box 03 Menu Add 2 Press OK The file list screen for the Box selected is displayed 30001 Box 01 n Note If the screen for entering a password is displayed then BiData 01 a enter the password using the numeric keys and then press Data 02 r OK Menu Select Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters The following operations are possible Editing Custom Boxes 5 10 Deleting Custom Boxes 5 11 Editing Custom Boxes 1 Inthe file list screen press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears Menu v OK Search Name Box Detail Edit Delete 2 Press A or V to select Box Detail Edit 3 Press OK The Detail screen appears Detail KES oK Box Name 1 9 Box 01 4 Press lt or gt to check each of the settings and make changes Zl Note For the method for making changes refer to Detailed SJ box settings on page 5 5 5 When the editing is completed press OK The file list screen reappears 5 10 Document Box Deleting Custom Boxes Menu Delete gt m Search Name Box Detail l Edit Delete Are you sure gt mjBox 01 yes JM No Custom Box 20003 Box 03 60004 Box 04 Menu NM m Add Sorting the Custom Box list In the file list screen press Menu Left
44. Default Value Network Network interface setting On USB Cable USB interface setting On Card Reader ID card reader setting Off RAM Disk RAM Disk Mode setting Off Parallel Cable Parallel interface setting Off Note Card Reader is only displayed when the ID card J reader function has been activated Parallel Cable is only displayed when the optional Parallel Interface Kit IB 32 has been installed Press A or V to select which function to set Press OK The screen for the function selected is displayed Press A or V to select whether or not to use sleep mode Select on to set the sleep mode Press OK Set the sleep mode for each function and Status menu reappears Note Repeat steps 5 to 8 to set sleep mode for a different amp N function 4 89 Operation Panel Except for Europe There are two sleep modes with different levels of sleep Quick Recovery and Energy Saver Quick Recovery Mode The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver mode Energy Saver Mode This makes it possible to reduce energy consumption even further than with Quick Recovery mode With Energy Saver mode you can set whether to enable the Energy Saver mode for each separate function Note For information on the Quick Recovery mode and Energy Saver mode refer to Energy Saver Function on N page 2 26 When the optional Network Interface Kit IB 50 or Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 has been inst
45. Detail menu screen reappears When user login administration is enabled this setting determines whether or not a Box will be shared with other users This setting is possible when Network user has been selected as the Owner Owner settings on page 5 6 Detail i Permission 3 9 Shared Change 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Permission Document Box Permission lt Private Ba OK 01 Shared Box Password Box password settin 9 Press Change Right Select The Permission screen appears Press A or V to select Shared or Private Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears It is possible to set a password for a box and restrict the users who have access to it Enter one if necessary Note This setting is not displayed when user login administration is enabled and the Permission settings for the amp sharing of a Box on page 5 6 has been set to Private Detail Box Password 4 CECELLELEEE Edit a OK 9 J ABC Text A New Password n Confirm Password ABC Text g E B Box number Change of the Box number Change the Box number Detail KES Uni Box Number 5 9 0001 Edit 1 In the Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Box Password Press Edit Right Select The New Password entry screen appears En
46. IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 11 12 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multi user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to ma
47. If the steam concerns you raise the room temperature or replace the paper with a newer dryer paper Tips Printer problems may be solved easily by following the tips below When you have encountered a problem that following the above guidelines will not solve try the following Turn the printer power off and wait for several seconds Then turn on the printer Reboot the computer which sends the print jobs to the printer Obtain and use the latest version of the printer driver The latest versions of printer drivers and utilities are available at http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com Make sure that the procedures for printing are correctly followed in the application software Consult the documentation supplied with the application software Troubleshooting Print Quality Problems The tables and diagrams in the following sections define print quality problems and the corrective action you can conduct to solve the problems Some solutions may require cleaning or replacing parts of the printer If the suggested corrective action will not solve the problem call for service Printed Results Corrective Action Black or white vertical streaks ABC ABC 143 133 The drum unit or developer unit may be damaged If the problem is not solved even after printing several pages call for service Faint or blurred printing ABC ABC 123 123 ABC 123 Check the EcoPrint settings When this se
48. Kit IB 32 has been installed 4 90 Operation Panel Network lt OK Off 11 12 Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time Set amount of time before entering Sleep The printer reverts to normal operation mode when the printer receives a print job OK is pressed or one of the exterior covers is opened The default time is 1 minute Sleep Timer Sard OK 1 120 1 2 Press A or V to select which function to set Press OK The screen for the function selected is displayed Press A or V to select whether or not to use Energy Saver mode Select On to set the Energy Saver mode Press OK Set the Energy Saver mode for each function and Status menu reappears Note Repeat steps 9 to 12 to set Energy Saver mode for a amp different function Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Sleep Timer Press OK The Sleep Timer screen appears Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the sleep time The timer can be set between 1 and 120 min for Europe or 1 and 240 min except for Europe Press OK The sleep time setting is stored and the Timer Setting menu reappears Power Off Rule Power Off Rule setting The Power Off Rule is used to stop the power from automatically turning off when the machine is in certain states or certain settings are in effect Rules that can be set and their initial settings are as follows Item Default Value Network N
49. Login Disp Status Log Mm JobsDetailStatus Jobs Log Exit JobsDetailStatus gt J 01 Show All My Jobs Only Hide All USB KeyboardType 01 us Europe US France lt m v 11 12 1 2 1 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login v Password is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the Disp Status Log menu Screen appears Press A or V to select JobsDetailStatus or Jobs Log Press OK The screen to set the display of jobs is displayed The setting of the display is as follows Show A11 All users can view the jobs My Jobs Only Only the user s own jobs are displayed Hide A11 Only users with administrator privileges can view the jobs Press A or V to select the display setting Press OK The display method is set and the Disp Status Log menu reappears USB KeyboardType USB keyboard type selection Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use In the Device Common menu press A or V to select USB KeyboardType Press OK The USB KeyboardType screen appears The available USB keyboard types are as follows US Europe US France Germany Press A or V to select
50. MACAddressFilter gt M o1kOff On 3 Press A or V to select whether MAC address filtering is enabled 4 Press OK The MAC address filtering setting is set and the Basic menu reappears Restart Network Restarting the optional Network Interface Kit After all network related settings have been done restart the network card of the device This is mandatory to make the settings effective 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select Restart Network 4 74 Operation Panel 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Restart Are you sure Yes No 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Restarting Please wait appears and the network is restarted Pressing No Right Select returns to the Basic menu without restarting the network Communication Select the network interface to use The client function such as the network authentication and the reference of user information via LDAP operates only by the selected interface This function is mainly used for the network system administrator For more information about each function refer to Command Center RX User Guide and IB 50 IB 51 User s Manual 1 Inthe Optional Network menu press A or V to select Communication 2 Press OK The Communication screen appears x Communication U Standard NIC Option NIC 3 Press A or V to select the desired NIC Standard NIC standard network interface of the printer
51. Note You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting Detail Press OK Press A or V to select Official Z Note There are also some applications that can be used for a limited trial period To use the application as a trial select Trial and press OK The confirmation screen is displayed So press Yes Left Select Press OK Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the license key Use lt and gt to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted Note Some applications do not require you to enter a license key 4 134 Operation Panel 17 Press OK License Key Ok 0000 9999 1234 18 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes Left Select IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application Note If a message prompting a restart is displayed after SV changes have been made then obey the message and switch the machine OFF and ON again Checking Application Details Use the procedure below to check the details of an application 1 Inthe op Functions menu press A or V to select the application to check the details of 2 Press OK DATA SECURITY v OK License On Detail 3 Press A or V to select Detail 4 Press OK You can now view detailed information on the selected application Detail KES Un Function Name 17 3 D
52. P n 3 2 Printer Driver Print Settings Scre et ssaivecccsscsccccscsisesacccrssortsacccstansestivecedussrennccedusteaanessarsadesensiaasctanuncscades 3 3 Printing on Non standard Sized Pape e eeaotucsac enini csasu ania bunE Situ nua VaR Ga XE a EE PUN ERE Gc cR REGES 3 4 Primer Diver MEID 3 5 Printing 9 O T 3 6 3 1 Printing Printing from Applications This section provides basic instructions for printing documents Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 To print the document from applications install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied Product Library disk Note Refer to nstalling Software on page 2 7 Follow the steps below to print documents from applications 1 Create a document using an application 2 Select Print in the application menu The Print dialog box appears 3 Clickthe W next to the Name field and select this machine from the list 4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box Enter any number up to 999 When there is more than one page select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers 5 Click Properties The Properties dialog box appears 6 Select the Basic tab and click Print size to select the print size To print on the special paper such as thic
53. Password Ui ABC Text 8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK cr A Name m The log in screen reappears Login Password Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login y Password is 4000 Login For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 98 Operation Panel 9 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the Security menu screen appears Security m Network Security I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Security Network security setting Use this procedure to specify the security settings for each of the network protocols used IMPORTANT Check with your network administrator when selecting network settings The options available in Network Security are as follows WSD PRINT WSD PRINT setting 4 99 Enhanced WSD Enhanced WSD setting 4 100 EnhancedWSD SSL Enhanced WSD SSL setting 4 100 IPP IPP setting 4 100 SSL Setting SSL Server setting 4 101 IPSec IPSec setting 4 103 ThinPrint Thin Print setting 4 103 LAN Interface LAN Interface setting 4 104 1 Inthe security menu press A or V to select Network Security 2 Press OK The Network Security menu screen appears Network Security Mm WSD PRINT Enhanced WSD EnhancedWSD SSL Exit WSD PRINT WSD PRINT setting Se
54. Select The Menu screen appears Press A or V to select Delete Press OK A confirmation screen appears To proceed with deleting the custom box press Yes Left Select Completed appears and the custom box is deleted The once deleting of the custom box ends the Custom Box list screen reappears Pressing No Right Select returns to the file list screen without deleting the custom box When user login administration is enabled it is possible to sort the list display into either Box Number order or Box Owner order Menu Search No lt m File Del Time Sort Box Owner m Searching Custom Boxes Inthe Custom Box list screen press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears Press A or V to select Sort Press OK The Sort screen appears Press A or V to select Box No or Box Owner Press OK The Menu screen reappears It is possible to search for a Custom Box using either the Box number or Box name Menu Sort Search No A lt gt Y File Del Time In the Custom Box list screen press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears 2 Press A or V to select Search No or Search Name Document Box Searching w Searching w Search No 0001 1000 Menu lt m ith Box numbers Menu 01 Search No Search Name 7 vu E Search No 0001
55. Systems Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Apple Macintosh OS 10 5 or later Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Host 2 Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T eKUIO slot 1 Option HD 6 HD 7 IB 50 IB 51 IB 32 PDL PRESCRIBE Emulation PCL6 IBM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 Line Printer KPDL KPDL Auto Memory Standard 256 MB Maximum 1280 MB Dimensions W x D x H 469 x 410 x 320 mm 18 7 16 x 16 1 8 x 12 5 8 Weight Approx 20 0 kg Approx 44 0 Ibs without toner container Power Requirement 220 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 5 4 A Power Maximum 1433 W Consumption aba an ST Standard uring Printing During Standby 14 0 W Sleep Modet 15W Power Off 0 5 W or less Power Maximum 1466 W Consumption With options During Printing 679W During Standby 19 2 W Sleep Modet 3 6 W Power Off 0 5 W or less A 27 Appendix Item Description The power consumption of the product in networked standby If all network ports are connected 1 3 W ErP Lot26 Option Expanded memory Paper Feeder 500 sheet x 4 SSD HD 6 HD 7 SD Card Network Interface Kit IB 50 Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 Parallel Interface Kit IB 32 Faceup Output Tray PT 4100 t The value is at Energy Saver mode defa
56. TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit TCP IP Enable Disable TCP IP This specified whether TCP IP is used The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings For details refer to TCP IP Enable Disable TCP IP on page 4 57 IPv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv4 The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings For details refer to Pv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings on page 4 58 IPv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv6 The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings For details refer to Pv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings on page 4 61 4 72 Operation Panel Netware NetWare setting NetWare is a PC based network operating system specifically for servers NetWare is a client server system that operates by installing the NetWare OS on the server and dedicated client modules NetWare clients on the client machines running MS DOS OS 2 Windows etc The basic network layer protocol used is NetWare s own IPX Internetwork Packet eXchange SPX Sequenced Packet eXchange but the system also supports TCP IP The feature of the NetWare OS is that it is specifically for servers unlike general purpose operating systems such as Windows NT and UNIX Only the minimum required for server operation can be performed from the NetWare OS console on the server Server
57. TIFF JPEG Size 3 Press OK The TIFF JPEG Size screen appears TIFF JPEG Size lt 0 l l 0l Paper Size The options available in TIFF JPEG Size are as follows Image Resolution Paper Size default Print Resolution Images are resized so that they fill the paper size when printed Image Resolution Image files are printed at the resolution specified in the resolution information Images with no resolution information are printed using the Paper Size setting Print Resolution Images are printed using a 1 to 1 correspondence between the image file pixels and printed dots For example the printed size of a 600 x 300 pixel image file is 1 inch x 1 2 inch 4 Press A or V to select whether TIFF JPEG Size mode is enabled 4 26 Operation Panel Function m Quiet Mode Duplex EcoPrint XPS FitTo Page Ok 01O ff On Detail om File Name 1 4 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail Detail KES Un Folder Name 1 2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail Detail om File Name 1 4 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail 5 1 1 Press OK The TIFF JPEG Size setting is set and the Function menu reappears Note Images are automatically rotated during printing to provide a closer match between the aspect ratios of the image file and the paper used for printing XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size S
58. The default is On KIR has no effect on the printing speed 1 inthe Print Quality menu press A or V to select KIR 2 Press OK The KIR screen appears KIR m Off 3 Press A or V to select whether the KIR mode is enabled 4 Press OK The KIR mode is set and the Print Quality menu Screen reappears EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode By enabling EcoPrint mode you can minimize the amount of toner used during printing Because images printed in this mode may be slightly coarser than those printed in standard resolution you should use EcoPrint for test prints or other situations where high quality prints are not required EcoPrint has no effect on the printing speed Use the procedure below to select EcoPrint mode The default setting is of f 1 Inthe Print Quality menu press A or V to select EcoPrint 2 Press OK The EcoPrint screen appears EcoPrint Ok 01kOff On 3 Press A or V to select whether the EcoPrint mode is enabled 4 Press OK The EcoPrint mode is set and the Print Quality menu screen reappears 4 50 Operation Panel Print Resolution Selecting the Print Resolution You can set the default print resolution in four ways 300dpi 600dpi Fast1200 and Fine1200 The clarity of printed characters and graphics becomes sharper in this order 1 2 Print Resolution gt J Finel200 02 Fast1200 600dpi 3 4 In the Print Quality menu press A o
59. This direction can easily cause wrinkles and creases when envelopes pass through the printer Before purchasing envelopes make a test print to check whether the printer accepts the envelope Do not use envelopes that have an encapsulated liquid adhesive Avoid a long printing session for envelopes only Extended envelope printing can cause premature printer wear fjams occur try setting a lesser number of envelopes on the MP tray To avoid jams caused by curled envelopes stack no more than 5 printed envelopes on the top tray A 23 Appendix Thick Paper Fan the stack of paper and align the edges before loading them in the MP tray Some types of paper have rough edges on the back those are created when the paper is cut In this case put the paper on a flat place and rub the edges once or twice with for example a ruler to smooth them Feeding rough edged paper may cause paper jams Note Ifthe paper jams even after you smooth it out load the amp paper in the MP tray with the leading edge rose up a few millimeters as shown in the illustration Colored Paper Colored paper should satisfy the same conditions as white bond paper refer to Paper Specifications on page A 16 In addition the pigments used in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of fusing during the printing process up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper should satisfy the same conditions as whit
60. administrator Log in again as an administrator 4 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name entry screen is displayed n Login User Name mMm ABC Text 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User N Name is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 6 Press or V to selectthe Login Password entry field Login User Name OK 4000 Login Password Login 7 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed n Login Password OK ABC Text 4 121 Operation Panel 8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK n e Name m The login screen reappears Login Password Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login Ilm Password is 4000 Login For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 i 9 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name User Job Account m and Login Password are correct the User Job Account menu 01 i User alog iicet screen appears Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 10 Press A or V to select Job Account Set 11 Press OK The Job Account Set menu appears Job Account Set Mm Job Account
61. affected by the smoothness size and moisture content of the paper and the way in which the paper is cut The higher the grade of paper you use the less risk there will be of paper jams and other problems and the higher the level of quality your printed output will reflect Differences between papers from different suppliers can also affect the machine s performance A high quality printer cannot produce high quality results when the wrong paper is used Low priced paper is not economical in the long run if it causes printing problems The recommended basis weight is Cassette 60 to 120 g m MP tray 60 to 220 g m 230 g m Cardstock e PF 4100 60 to 120 g m Paper Specifications The following table summarizes the basic paper specifications Details are given on the following pages Item Specification Weight Cassette PF 4100 60 to 120 g m MP Tray 60 to 220 g m 230 g m Cardstock Dimensions Refer to Paper Sizes on page A 18 Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm 0 0276 inches Squareness of corners 90 10 2 Moisture content 4 96 to 6 96 Pulp content 80 96 or more Appendix Minimum and Maximum Paper Sizes The minimum and maximum paper sizes are as follows For non standard paper such as labels vellum cardstock envelope and thick the MP Multi Purpose tray must be used For information on how to set paper sizes refer to MP Tray Set MP tray settings on page 4 30 Paper Cassette MP Tray M
62. and file management is basically carried out using management tools from the clients Also all drivers and protocol stacks are in the form of modules called NetWare Loadable Modules NLMs and the ability of NLMs to load and unload flexibly and dynamically is a major advantage of this system 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select Netware 2 Press OK The Netware screen appears NetWare m Off 3 Press or V to select whether NetWare is enabled 4 Press OK The NetWare setting is set and the Basic menu reappears AppleTalk AppleTalk setting AppleTalk is a communications protocol used primarily on Macintosh computers and also refers to the Mac OS network functions AppleTalk assigns 24 bit network addresses a 16 bit network section and an 8 bit node address that are used to identify devices computers printers etc on the network When the power is turned on a broadcast signal is sent out onto the network and the addresses and machine names are automatically assigned The default setting is On 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select AppleTalk 2 Press OK The AppleTalk screen appears AppleTalk n Off 3 Press or V to select whether AppleTalk is enabled 4 Press OK The AppleTalk setting is set and the Basic menu reappears IPSec IPSec setting IPSec IP Security Protocol is a security protocol adopted as the standard by the IETF for authentication and encryption in
63. auto Err Clear screen appears z Auto Err Clear mMm 01 kOff On 3 Press A or V to select whether automatic error recovery is enabled 4 Press OK The automatic error recovery setting is set and the Timer Setting menu reappears Err Clear Timer Setting the error clear time If Auto Err Clear is setto On and a non fatal error an error that allows printing to continue occurs this setting specifies the time until the error is recovered and printing resumes The default setting is 30 seconds 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V toselect Err Clear Timer 2 Press OK The Err Clear Timer screen appears Err Clear Timer mMm 5 495 BEG sec 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the recovery time 4 Press OK The recovery time setting is stored and the Timer Setting menu reappears FormFeed TimeOut Automatic form feed timeout setting Receiving print data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The default setting is 30 seconds 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select FormFeed TimeOut 4 93 Operation Panel FormFeed TimeOut gt Mm 5 495 EE sec Login User Name i Login Password Login n L
64. explains about the Document Box function Chapter 6 Status Menu This chapter explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter explains about the replacement of toner container and the cleaning of the printer Chapter 8 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to handle error messages paper jams and other problems Appendix This section explains the method for entering characters an introduction to optional products and the printer specifications Conventions This manual uses the following conventions Convention Description Example Italic Typeface Used to emphasize a key word phrase or reference to additional information To replace the toner container refer to Toner Container Replacement on page 3 2 Bold Used to denote buttons on the software To start printing click OK Bracket Bold Used to denote operation panel keys Press OK to resume printing Note Used to provide additional or useful information about a function or feature Note Check with your network administrator for the network address settings Important Used to provide important information IMPORTANT Ensure paper is not folded curled or damaged Caution Indicates what must be observed to CAUTION The fuser unit inside the printer prevent injury or machine breakdown is hot Do not touch it with your hands as
65. feed from the MP tray 4 42 Paper Feed Mode Setting the paper feed source 4 43 Duplex Setting the duplex printing 4 43 Paper Output Selecting the output stack 4 44 Override A4 LTR Overriding difference between A4 and Letter 4 45 Emulation Setting the emulation 4 45 Font Selecting the default font 4 47 Code Set Setting the code set 4 49 Print Quality Setting print quality 4 50 Page Setting Setting pagination 4 52 User Name The User Name display settings 4 56 Job Name The Job Name display settings 4 56 1 Press Menu Print Settings m Auto Cass Change MP Tray Priority Exit 2 Press or V to select Print Settings 3 Press OK The Print Settings menu appears showing a list of available options Paper Source Selecting the paper feed source You can select the paper source from which the printer feeds paper as the default If an optional paper feeder s is installed it can also be set the default paper source 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Paper Source Pubs Source pe OK available paper sources MP Tray 0J Cassette 1 The available paper sources are as follows MP Tray Cassette 1 printer s standard paper cassette 2 Press OK The Paper Source screen appears showing a list of the Cassette 2 to 5 optional paper feeders only installed paper feeders are shown 3 Press A or V to select the desired paper s
66. inicie ie ieiices ntti ini iii eet ei 8 3 arp 8 5 Clearing Paper James teste casei nad beca odii detec edes sed v e Cu Iac di dw KL VEHI oae CE IS d Iro d coe ra doe ld C Via SaRRL db Ud 8 16 Pis po A 1 Character Entry Method cs oan ha aaa edu iL dii dl ates ete ce A 2 About the OPHONS fae enna ee Oe se a nee eee oes ner eee eee e A 5 Expansion Memory Modules reete ree det El ate eU enn aed I LE A 6 General DEScCriptiGn OF OPHONS acc cesce cdees A 9 Paper ee ee ee ee on MC MM Mu M A 16 SpecHlicallolis sec EIER MI MILII eee A 26 tn T Glossary 1 o Index 1 Legal and Safety Information A CAUTION NO LIABILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY IMPROPER INSTALLATION Notice on Software SOFTWARE USED WITH THIS PRINTER MUST SUPPORT THE PRINTER S EMULATION MODE The printer is factory set to emulate the PCL Notice The information in this guide is subject to change without notification Additional pages may be inserted in future editions The user is asked to excuse any technical inaccuracies or typographical errors in the present edition No responsibility is assumed if accidents occur while the user is following the instructions in this guid
67. is started using the PIN code for the machine The PIN code displayed should be entered at the access point The PIN code for the machine is generated automatically 1 Inthe Quick Setup menu press or V toselect PIN Device 2 Press OK A PIN code is displayed on the Message display Enter the PIN code into the access point and press Next PIN XXXXXXXX vex 1 PIN code 3 Write down the PIN code displayed on the Message display 4 Press Next Right Select The message Connecting appears 5 Atthe access point immediately enter the PIN code which wrote down on step 3 The connection with the access point starts PIN Terminal Connect using a PIN code for the access point The connection is started using the PIN code for the access point Enter the PIN code for the access point For details of the PIN code for the access point refer to the Operation Guide of the access point 1 Inthe Quick Setup menu press A or V to select PIN Terminal 2 Press OK The PIN code entry screen appears PIN Code lt OK A ABC Text 3 Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys Note Up to 8 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 Press OK The message Connecting appears and the connection with the access point starts Custom Setup Detailed settings for the wireless network It is possible to c
68. it and how to deal with it c may result in burn injury Warning Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury WARNING If you ship the printer remove and pack the developer unit in a plastic bag and ship them separately from the printer xi xii 1 Machine Parts This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Components at the Front Right of the Pritnter ccccessseeceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeseeeseeeeeesssneeeessseeneeseenenes 1 2 Components at the Front Left of the Printer cccsssseeessseeeeesssseeeesesseneeeeeseeneeesessneaeesseneeeeesenanes 1 2 Internal Componeftie iicet tna to tobsein Gu pk brin iraro kadir i dL ln BIER I Rn S SE rR UAM Man RA EL R Mas EM BRERP RENE dE ERES 1 3 Components at the Rear of the Printer csseecesssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseneeeeeseneeseeseneeseeeseeeeeeseneeneesesnaees 1 4 erri an I 1 5 1 1 Machine Parts Components at the Front Right of the Printer Paper Stopper Top Tray Paper Width Guides MP tray MP Multi Purpose Tray Support Tray Section of the MP Tray Cassette 1 Operation Panel USB Memory Slot Power Switch 0 Handholds 11 Paper Size Window O ON OO FWHNDN Components at the Front Left of the Printer 1 Left Cover 2 Waste Toner Box 3 Handholds Machine P
69. keys to enter the access code entered in the printer driver 4 Press Enter Right Select If the entered access code is correct the Delete menu screen appears If the entered access code is incorrect the 1D menu screen reappears Delete Are you sure Ei Document 201408 Note When the access code is set to the document vs pd we SJ selected in the check box ID error is displayed for the disagreement 5 27 Document Box 5 Press Yes Left Select complete appears and the printer deletes the selected job Pressing No Right Select returns to the file list screen Completed Job Box Setting Job Box Configuration Change Job Box setting such as the maximum number of storable documents in the Document Box and automatic delete settings and select the storage media The following items are available in the Job Box setting Quick Copy Jobs Changing the Maximum Number of Quick Copy jobs 5 28 JobRet Deletion Set Automatic Delete times for Temporary Jobs 5 28 Storage Media Selecting the storage media for the jobs 5 29 Quick Copy Jobs Changing the Maximum Number of Quick Copy jobs This changes maximum number of Quick Copy jobs to a value between 0 and 300 The default is 32 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Job Box Setting 2 Press OK The Job Box Setting screen appears Job Box Setting Mm JobRet Deletion Storage Media Exit
70. machine set the SMTP setting to On For details refer to Protocol Detail Detailed SV settings for the network protocol on page 4 63 A mail server must be registered For the method for setting a server refer to the Command Center RX User Guide 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press CETT lt i Function Right Select The Function menu appears ure oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press Aor V to select JobFinish Notice 3 Press OK The JobFinish Notice screen appears JobFinish Notice Mm 01 kOff On 4 Press or V to select On 5 Press OK The Address Entry screen appears Address Entry Ui ABC Text 6 Enter the E Mail address to be notified Note Up to 128 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters When user login administration is set the address of the logged in user is entered 7 Press OK Register the address and the Function menu reappears Del after Print Delete data after printing setting Use this setting to specify whether or not the file data is deleted after printing 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press ETT 0 Function Right Select The Function menu appears ule oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press Aor V toselect Del after Print 5 18 Document Box 3 Press OK The Del after Print screen appears Del a
71. menu screen appears Network lt OK TCP IP Settings Restart Network Exit 4 Select TCP IP Settings and press OK The TCP IP Settings TCP IP Settings lt gt menu screen appears TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit TCP IP Enable Disable TCP IP The TCP IP system refers to the Internet system which has a 5 layer structure consisting of the interface layer link layer network IP layer transport TCP UDP layer and application layer The interface layer is a key layer in the TCP IP system that provides an abstracted interface that is not dependent on the link Communication line frame relay or Ethernet etc to the IP module IP layer This means that the IP module can use this abstracted interface which is not dependent on the link type to exchange IP packets back and forth with the link layer 1 Inthe TCP IP Settings menu press A or V to select TCP IP 2 Press OK The TCP IP screen appears TCP IP pad OK Off 3 Press A or V to select whether TCP IP is enabled 4 Press OK The TCP IP setting is set and the TCP IP Settings menu reappears Operation Panel IPv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv4 1 Inthe TCP IP Settings menu press A or V to select IPv4 Setting 2 Press OK The IPv4 Setting menu screen appears IPv4 Setting Pas OK Auto IP IP Address Exit The options ava
72. of Se ect Deselect All Files on page 5 23 In the file list screen press A or V to select All Files Press Select Right Select When all files in the Job Box are checked all checkmarked files are deselected When there is a file not checked in the Job Box all files will be checkmarked 5 23 Document Box Print a File Print the file s selected in the Job Box 1 Inthe file list screen select the item and press OK The Print amp User 01 Ui bd Delete menu screen appears HS ii 025Delete 2 Press or V to select Print and press OK The Copies menu os Bin vu screen appears i copies To print 2 or more copies use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the number of copies to be printed Note is displayed first and it means it according to the amp N set number of copies when the data of each file is preserved In this setting each set number of copies is printed 3 Press OK The message Accepted appears and the printer prints Accepted the selected job Deleting a Quick Copy Proof and Hold Job Jobs saved using Quick Copy and Proof and Hold are automatically deleted when you turn the printer off but you can also use this procedure to delete jobs individually 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Quick Copy 2 Press OK The Quick Copy screen appears listing the user names SUI Copy XE for stored jobs amp User 01 amp User 02 amp User 0
73. of the main charger When print quality has deteriorated the 1 5 output of the main charger can be changed to restore print quality Note This menu only appears when Altitude Adj is setto Normal 4 132 Operation Panel Op Functions Optional application settings You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Application The applications listed below are installed on this machine DATA SECURITY Data Security Kit E ID Card Card Authentication Kit B UG 33 ThinPrint There are also some applications that can be used for a limited trial period Note Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending amp on the application The options available in Op Functions menu are as follows Starting Application Use 4 133 Checking Application Details 4 135 Starting Application Use Use the procedure below to start using an application 1 Press Menu 2 Press A or V to select Op Functions 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name i Note When user login administration is set Login Password When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Op Functions menu screen is Login displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator 4 With the Login User Name entry
74. or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored 6 Click Print 5 Select the checkbox of the document to be printed For settings that are configurable refer to Command Center RX User Guide 2 24 Preparation before Use Power On Off Power On IMPORTANT When turning off the power switch do not turn on the power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the power switch em 1 Press the Power switch RR Power Off Make sure that the Data 1 Make sure that the Data indicator is off then press the Power switch indicator is off 2 25 Preparation before Use Energy Saver Function Sleep For Europe When the set time factory setting is 1 minute elapses after the printer is last used the printer automatically enters sleep mode The message display backlight and lights turn off to minimize power consumption This status is referred to as Sleep To use the printer press OK The printer will be ready to use within 18 seconds For more information about configuring settings refer to Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time on page 4 91 Except for Europe When the set time factory setting is 1 minute elapses after the printer is last used the printer automatically enters sleep mode The message display backlight and lights turn off to minimize power consumption This status is referred to as Sleep There are two sleep modes Quick Reco
75. paper size and type Paper cassette size and type Copies EcoPrint KIR mode Resolution Sleep level Sleep time Power off time Form feed timeout time MP tray empty Installed Options This item shows the options installed in the printer Paper Feeder SD card SSD Card Authentication Kit B Data Security Kit E UG 33 Network Status This item shows the IP address subnet mask address and default gateway address for the network interface card in the printer Interface Information This information shows the block status for items including the USB memory slot and USB interface When connected by network interface card NIC block status is shown for an optional interface Memory This item shows Standard memory in the printer Option memory slot status in megabytes Total memory in the printer Current status of the RAM disk Emulation This item shows all available emulations of the printer The PCL 6 emulation is set as the default when the printer is shipped from the factory The emulations are PCL6 KPDL Line Printer IBM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 4 13 Operation Panel 8 Page Information This shows counter information Total printed page count and total page count of each paper size 9 Data Sanitization The status of the Data Sanitization implementation is displayed 10 Consumable Status This item shows the approximate level of remaining toner When the val
76. permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER
77. plus symbol to add the installed printer driver 9 Select Default and click the item that appears in Name Select the driver in Use and click Add Note When using an IP connection click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the IP address and printer name The number entered in Address will automatically appear in Name Change if needed 10 Select the options available for the machine and click OK 11 The selected printer is added 2 13 Preparation before Use Status Monitor The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function Note When you activate Status Monitor check the status below KX Driver is Installed Either Enhanced WSD or EnhancedWSD SSL are set to On in Security Security function setting on page 4 98 Accessing the Status Monitor The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started Exiting the Status Monitor Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor Exit manually Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor Exit automatically The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used Status Monitor Display The display of the Status Monitor is as follows Quick View State The status of the printer is displayed using icons Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked
78. printer is not used while in sleep mode the power automatically turns off The Power Off Timer is used to set the time until the power turns off The factory setting for the time until the power turns off is 1 hour IMPORTANT You can set the power off rule and power off timer For details refer to Power Off Rule Power Off Rule setting on page 4 91 and Power Off Timer Power off timer settings on page 4 92 2 26 Preparation before Use In case of not using the printer for an extended period of time CAUTION If this printer will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the power Switch If the printer will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution CAUTION Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity 2 27 Preparation before Use Loading Paper The following explains the procedure for loading paper in the cassette and the MP tray Loading Paper into the Cassette The cassettes can hold plain paper recycled paper or color paper Cassette 1 to 5 hold up to 500 sheets of plain paper 80 g m For details of the supported paper sizes refer to Selecting the Right Paper on page A 18 For the paper type setting refer to Media Type Setting the cassette paper type on page 4 36 IMPORTANT You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface
79. recycled paper may be used Note Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types A 31 Appendix A 32 Glossary Additional memory An additional memory optional is used for increasing the memory capacity of this machine For DIMM that can be used in this machine contact your service technician AppleTalk AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network Auto IP Auto IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup However DHCP requires a DHCP server Auto IP is a server less method of choosing an IP address IP addresses between 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 are reserved for Auto IP and assigned automatically Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settin
80. shaded part indicates the standard weight U S Bond Weight Ib Europe Metric Weight g m U S Bond Weight Ib Europe Metric Weight g m 16 60 32 120 17 64 34 128 20 75 36 135 21 80 39 148 22 81 42 157 24 90 43 163 27 100 47 176 28 105 53 199 A 19 Appendix Moisture Content Moisture content is defined as the percent ratio of moisture to the dry mass of the paper Moisture can affect the paper s appearance feed ability curl electrostatic properties and toner fusing characteristics The moisture content of the paper varies with the relative humidity in the room When the relative humidity is high and the paper absorbs moisture the paper edges expand becoming wavy in appearance When the relative humidity is low and the paper loses moisture the edges shrink and tighten and print contrast may suffer Wavy or tight edges can cause jams and alignment anomalies To ensure correct moisture content it is important to store the paper in a controlled environment Some tips on moisture control are Store paper in a cool dry location Keep the paper in its wrapping as long as possible Re wrap paper that is not in use Store paper in its original carton Place a pallet etc under the carton to separate it from the floor After removing paper from storage let it stand in the same room as the machine for 48 hours before use Avoid leaving paper where it is exposed to heat s
81. sn asas bE Ra Depas nEUEs 3 4 Printer Driver Help e 3 5 Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings Windows 7 esses eseeeenn enne 3 5 xu nimmst A 3 6 4 Operation Panel Message DISDIAY enne 4 2 OY 4 4 Using the Menu Selection System nsccciissiccccscscccesiccaccccectesreescesencassctatenascetan venus cantatceneaedceseeuedesbewseceucievsucteenawaes 4 7 Setting a Mode Selection Menu 1 2 ii ice eicrsaaai tacens taa o cas asd dL AS E op do ED EYED aso R EE AL Cosa a ERN DUOC aiaiai 4 9 lp 4 10 USB Memory USB memory selection eeesieeseeeeeeeeiies seien nenne ns nennen nnn nn nasa santa assa ass n anna 4 21 Counter Viewing the counter vale 1 cniin cete cecus cursar nunc denne raa o dr aaeain 4 29 ligu rme M 4 30 aug El 4 41 Network Network settings 1 eae ciini tensa toca ess cca nasa amenaza ass ca mma asncr a cede ead cecdenandeccenenets 4 57 Optional Network Optional Network settings esseeeeeeeeeeeeeenee eee ee eene nennen nnnm nnn nn nenne nennen nnn 4 65 Device Common Selecting Setting the common device assesses essen enne nnn nnn 4 76 i e pateret wisis 4 98 User Job Account User Login Setting Job Account sett
82. starts B Data Flashing If Please wait is displayed the printer is warming up Or the printer cannot print for some reason e g there is no paper in the cassette Check the message I Attention display and carry out the required action For details refer to Error Messages on page 8 5 On The printer cannot print due to an error Check the message display and carry out the required action For details refer to Error Messages on page 8 5 4 3 Operation Panel Keys The operation panel keys are used to configure the printer operation Note that certain keys have a secondary function Cancel Key Q Cc This key is used to Cancel a printing job Stop the alarm sound Canceling a Printing Job 1 While the printer displays Processing press Cancel The Job Cancel List appears showing the list of current print jobs 2 Press A or V to display the desired job and then press OK When the Job will be canceled Are you sure message appears press Yes Left Select to cancel the job or No Right Select to cancel this operation and continue printing When you cancel a job Canceling appears on the message display and printing stops after the page currently printing has been fed output Logout Key e If user control is set then please log out by pressing Logout after operations are completed Menu lets you enter the menu system to change the setup and printing environment
83. the desired USB keyboard type Press OK The USB keyboard type is set and the Device Common menu reappears TonerAlert Level Setting for the alert level for toner addition This sets the toner addition alert level displayed on the status monitor In the Device Common menu press A or V to select TonerAlert Level 4 95 Operation Panel Login User Name B Ok Login Password Login A lt gt v Login User Name ABC Text Login User Name ai 4000 Login Password 2m Login Password Text Login User Name Ok 4000 Login Password CEE m TonerAlert Level TonerAlert Level exit Off On Off On v OK 02 On 01 Off 9 Press OK The Login screen appears Note When user login administration is set When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the TonerAlert Level menu screen is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name entry screen is displayed Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Name is 4000 For details on e
84. to select Domain Name 2 Press OK The Domain screen appears Domain pag OK 01 Domain 01 Domain 02 5 w 3 Press A or V to select the domain name for the authentication server and press OK The domain is registered and the Netwk Auth Set menu reappears If the domain has not been set select the number where is displayed and press Menu Right Select 4 Press or V to select Edit 2 5 Press OK The Domain screen appears Domain vU ABC Text 6 Enter the domain name using the numeric keys Note Up to 256 characters can be entered For details on amp entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 7 Press OK The Domain menu reappears 8 Check if the entered domain name is selected press OK The domain name is registered and the Netwk Auth Set menu reappears NW User Property Obtain the network user property This setting is to acquire user information from the LDAP server Note This setting is only displayed when Netwk Authentic has been set as the Login Type Enabling of User SJ Login Administration on page 4 112 and NTLM or Kerberos has been set as the Server Type Server type selection on page 4 113 1 Inthe User Login Set menu press A or V to select NW User Property 4 114 Operation Panel NW User Property mM Off On Authenticat Type Exit 2 Press OK The NW User
85. try using a different type of paper replace the paper with paper from another ream or flip the paper stack over The printer may have problems if paper jams recur after the paper is replaced Whether or not the jammed pages are reproduced normally after printing is resumed depends on the location of the paper jam Precautions with Paper Jams Do not reuse jammed papers Ifthe paper tears during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming Utilizing Online Help Messages When Paper Jam is displayed press Help Left Select to display the procedure to clear the jam Press V to display the next step or press A to display the previous step Press OK to exit the online help message display Troubleshooting MP Tray Paper is jammed at the MP tray Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below 1 Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray IMPORTANT Before clearing the jammed paper remove the paper on the MP tray 2 Temporarily take the paper remaining in the MP tray out and then put it back in again Paper Cassette Paper Feeder Paper is jammed at the cassette Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below Paper jams in the cassette of the optional paper feeder are removed in the same way This section explains procedures using Cassette 1 as an example 1 Pull out the cassett
86. under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries AirPrint and AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Google and Google Cloud Print are trademarks and or registered trademarks of Google Inc All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies The designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide License Agreements GPL LGPL This product contains GPL http www gnu org licenses gpl html and or LGPL http www gnu org licenses Igpl html Software as part of its firmware You can get the source code and you are permitted to copy redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL LGPL For further information including availability of the source code visit http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com gpl Open SSL License Copyright 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyr
87. use Bind Long Edge or Bind Short Edge with either landscape or portrait printing Depending on the binding type and print orientation the duplexer provides four types of binding These are 1 portrait Bind Long Edge 2 portrait Bind Short Edge 3 landscape Bind Long Edge and 4 landscape Bind Short Edge The figure below shows these binding methods 2 Portrait Bind Short Edge Portrait Bind Long Edge 3 Landscape E 3 Bind Short Edge Landscape 4 Bind Long Edge 2 5 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Duplex 2 Press OK The Duplex screen appears showing the list of available duplex printing modes Duplex m Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge 3 Press A or V to select the desired duplex printing mode The message display toggles through the following Off default Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge Selecting o f disables duplex printing 4 Press OK The duplex printing mode is set and the Print Settings menu reappears Paper Output Selecting the output stack The Paper Output menu on the operation panel allows you to select either the face down tray or the faceup tray option for the output stack 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Paper Output 2 Press OK The Paper Output screen appears Paper Output m 1 TopTray FaceDown RearTray FaceUp 3 Press A or V to select output stack TopTray FaceDown
88. 00BASE Half 100BASE Full 1000BASE T 3 Press or V to select the desired LAN Interface 4 Press OK The LAN Interface is set and the Network Security menu reappears I F Block Set External interface block setting You can use this to block and thereby protect the interface The options available in I F Block Set are as follows USB Host USB Port setting 4 105 USB Device USB interface setting 4 105 Option I F Optional network interface setting 4 105 e Parallel I F Parallel interface setting 4 106 USB Storage USB memory setting 4 106 4 104 Operation Panel 1 Inthe security menu press A or V toselect I F Block Set A 2 Press OK The 1 F Block Set menu screen appears I F Block Set pad OK USB Host USB Device Option I F Exit USB Host USB Port setting This blocks and protects the USB Port USB Host The default setting is Unblock 1 Inthe I F Block Set menu press A or V to select USB Host 2 Press OK The USB Host screen appears USB Host mm 01 Unblock Block 3 Press or V to select whether to block and protect the USB host 4 Press OK The USB Host setting is set and the I F Block Set menu reappears USB Device USB interface setting This blocks and protects the USB interface The default setting is Unblock 1 Inthe I F Block Set menu press A or V to select USB Device 2 Press OK The USB Device scre
89. 1000 Menu n oa OK B ith Box names Menu 01 Search No Search Name Search Name m Box ABC Menu Text Press OK The Search No screenorthe Search Name screen appears Searching is possible using the methods below Searching with Box numbers 5 12 Searching with Box names 5 12 In the Search No press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears Press or V to select Search No Press OK The Search No screen appears Enter the Box number to be found and press OK A search is done for the Box number entered In the Search No press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears Press or V to select Search Name Press OK The Search Name screen appears Enter the Box name to be found and press OK A search is done for the Box name entered Note Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters Setting automatic document deletion for Custom Boxes Set the time for documents stored in Custom Boxes to be automatically deleted Menu Sort Search No File Del Time lt m 1 In the Custom Box list screen press Menu Left Select The Menu screen appears 2 Press Aor V to select File Del Time 5 12 Document Box 3 Press OK The File Del Time screen appears File Del Time Sard OK Hour Min Hm 00 4 Use the numeric key
90. 3 3 Press A or V to select the user name you entered in the printer driver 4 Press OK The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the selected user name amp User 01 OK fj Data 01 End Data 02 i 5 Press A or V to select the name of the job to be deleted When Select Right Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file Select the checkmarked file and press Select Right Select again to cancel the selection Note To select all files follow the steps of Select Deselect All amp Files on page 5 23 5 24 Document Box Delete a File Delete the file s selected in the Job Box 1 In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print LEISURE Delete menu screen appears Delete 2 Press A or V to select Delete and press OK A confirmation De lees message is appears Are you sure Document 201408 i Yes No 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Completed appears Completed and the printer deletes the selected job Pressing No Right Select returns to the file list screen Private Stored Printing a Private Print Stored Job In private printing you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job from the operation panel When sending the job from the application software specify a 4 digit access code in the printer
91. 3 8 4 Operation Panel This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Message ES rn M 4 2 Di e P 4 4 Using the Menu Selection System aereeuunr ia itr ann cc tk auno sa trea aane bain Seb cc ia usc Pba vta Sn a Fad nn RrEPRIR S CE ReE 4 7 Seting a Mode Selecion Ment 4 9 REPOTI 4 10 USB Memory USB memory selection eeeeeeeeeeee esee essei eene nenne nnn nnne n nuin nnnn nane nnn 4 21 Counter Viewing the counter vali nnainr mesh PAREXMAR RIA EARERYEPERXMNEAKRER ERR R RR RR ER EERREERKRES ARMAR ERAN EAR RA SACER 4 29 Paper Seti GS srini 4 30 Print Settings 4 41 Network NetWork Settings iiiaascixc rbv HIE RAN UE MED AE RUE aiiai 4 57 Optional Network Optional Network settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee nennen nennen nennen nnn 4 65 Device Common Selecting Setting the common device eee 4 76 Security Security Ttunction setting ena tton ntn ttn ntt annaa aaae anaana IIR Sce RR akiai 4 98 User Job Account User Login Setting Job Account setting
92. 34 Paper type z 24 od e aged etre t e ne eae 4 33 Paper Jams lllslllle ee 8 16 Locations S conoces ea er ae eee oe 8 16 MESSAGE oleas edo aia a naa i diarias dus 8 16 Paper Outputs ccs ci oee in senna eee ee ee hee rn Rs 4 44 Paper size Dial 23 22 heh i Ack bh ru REDE Sx bee 4 33 Paper Stopper 22 ccc ceacGua na Rm eee Ee OR 1 2 2 35 Parallel Interface Kit 000020000e ee A 11 PIN COQ iM iy tx dieu Sate site use ext eters Ra eee 4 115 Postcards oi dois e bowed eese kw liec m DUE A 23 Power Cord Connector 0000000 eee 1 4 Power Cord Connector Cover 04 1 4 Power Switch liliis 1 2 Preprinted Paper 0 02000 ee eeeee A 24 Print Density 0 0000 c eee eee 4 51 PrntiQuality 22 08 ge ieee hie SER er Eos oes 4 50 Problems cosi eee e ex 8 3 Print Quality Problems Troubleshooting 0 0000 ee eee eee 8 3 Print Resolution 0 0000 e eee eee 4 51 Printer Driver llli 2 7 Macintosh 0000 00 e eee eee e 2 11 WINdOWS uiu Cis oes Ga enne ca ede een wg 2 7 Printer Driver Help 0 00 0 cee eee eee 3 5 Printing from Applications leere 3 2 Prolonged Non Use esses 7 11 Q Quiet Mode 0 000 c cee eee 4 130 R RAM DISK apiela nare e ee Sate ete a 4 82 Rear Cover ussleelllee ete eee 1 4 Rear Unit Clearing paperjams sees 8 22 Recy
93. 4 62 O Online Help Messages For clearing paper jams LL 8 17 Operation Panel llselseleeleeesn 1 2 1 5 Option Card authentication kit 000000 A 5 Expansion memory module 0005 A 5 Faceup output tray llle A 5 Network interface kit 000005 A 5 Paper feeder ccc ccc eee eens A 5 Parallel interface kit 0000000000 A 5 SDcard 34 22 uis Duce doe s wees A 5 A 9 SSD c ende ein P ae ea eee ea ae ee ERA A 5 USB flash memory 0 000 eee eee A 5 Wireless network interface kit A 5 Option Interface Slot 2 00220005 1 4 Optional Functions 0 00 0 cee ee eee 4 133 Optional Network Settings 04 4 65 AppleTalk 3 sate cenit es oak Cee cane SE 4 73 Basic settings 0 cece cee eee 4 72 Communication 0000 0c eee eee 4 75 ld ET 4 73 LAN interface 00000 cece eee 4 74 MAC address filtering 00000000s 4 74 Netware io eee pected eee ieee eee ee ewan 4 73 TCP IP settings sinl RR Re 4 72 Wireless network 2 0000020 eee eee 4 66 Orientation 0 000000 eee 4 54 Other PaperSize esee ee eee 4 34 Index 2 P Page Setting sitacehekeed es RI PARARE ainai gas 4 52 Paper Colored paper au 4 225 ada igre dna ee ust A 24 Envelopes oi bes euet er Roxana EOS Eod A 23 Guideline
94. A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel A special mount is also available to install the keyboard on the printer Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on keyboards that are compatible with your printer before you purchase one ThinPrint Option This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver A 15 Appendix Paper General Guidelines The machine is designed to print on standard copier paper the type used in ordinary dry copier machines but it can also accept a variety of other types of paper within the limits specified below Note The manufacturer assumes no liability for problems that occur when paper not satisfying these requirements amp is used Selection of the right paper is important Using the wrong paper can result in paper jams curling poor print quality and paper waste and in extreme cases can damage the machine The guidelines given below will increase the productivity of your office by ensuring efficient trouble free printing and reducing wear and tear on the machine Paper Availability Most types of paper are compatible with a variety of machines Paper intended for xerographic copiers can also be used with the machine There are three general grades of paper economy standard and premium The most significant difference between grades is the ease with which they pass through the machine This is
95. AA Labels wy A4 Plain Function 5 Press A or V to select the tray containing the paper you want to use 6 Press OK The message Accepted appears and printing begins PRES ES When on is selected in the Del afterPrint Setting for file deletion after printing on page 5 9 the selected file will be deleted from the Custom Box after it is printed Print Function Settings When printing the print settings can be changed Options available in Print Function Settings are as follows Quiet Mode Selecting the Quiet Mode 5 16 Duplex Setting the duplex printing 5 16 EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode 5 17 File Name Entry entering a file name 5 17 JobFinish Notice Settings for notification when jobs are finished 5 18 Del after Print Delete data after printing setting 5 18 5 15 Document Box Quiet Mode Selecting the Quiet Mode Lower print speed for quiet processing Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable For details refer to Quiet Mode Setting the Quiet Mode on page 4 130 Note The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode This cannot be used when Prohibit is set for Each Job Permission for settings for each jobs on page 4 131 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Closers 0r Function Right Select The Function menu appears jb oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press A or V to select Quiet
96. ATA SECURITY Detail 4 135 Operation Panel 4 136 5 Document Box This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Bresiugd ell 5 2 elcNI C 5 3 JOD BOX e 5 21 Computer Settings Printer Drivel e eere recon ktns tre aaraa a eE Ea nna araa aaa 5 30 5 1 Document Box Document Box The Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer onto the memory on the machine and then printing it by operating the operation panel 3 DEF 6 uno Document Document Box has the following functions Custom Box 5 3 Job Box 5 21 Outline of Custom Box and Job Box The outline of Custom Box and Job Box and the options required are as follows Primary function Custom Box This is a general purpose box Print data can be stored to the Custom Box and then re used whenever necessary Press Document Box to display the Document Box menu Job Box Job Boxis a print function that makes the Job Retention function possible Job Retention has four modes as summarized below Quick Copy To later print additional copies Proof and Hold To proof the first copy before printing multiple copies Private Print To hold the document i
97. Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray For standard paper sizes Asp BSD Aap BaD AUI A4c Letter better slide the paper width guides to the corresponding mark Legall Ledger 5 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go IMPORTANT When loading the paper keep the print side facing up Curled paper must be uncurled before use When loading paper into the multi purpose tray check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more first remove the left over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator 6 Setthe MP tray paper size on the printer s operation panel Refer to MP Tray Set MP tray settings on page 4 30 2 33 Preparation before Use Loading Envelopes 5 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows Acceptable Envelope Size Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 En
98. Box set the RAM disk mode to Off For details refer to RAM Disk Setting Using the RAM disk on page 4 82 Job Retention Job Retention has four modes as summarized below These modes are selected from the printer driver through the application software Quick Copy Proof and Hold Private Print Stored Job Primary function To later print additional copies To proof the first copy before printing multiple copies To hold the document in printer to prevent unauthorized access To electronically store documents such as fax cover pages Start storing by On terminating print setting from application software Printer driver Prints simultaneously Printer driver Prints one copy simultaneously Printer driver Does not print Printer driver Does not print Retrieved by Operation panel Operation panel Operation panel Operation panel Default number of copies printed at retrieval Same as storing can be changed One less can be changed Same as storing can be changed One can be changed Maximum number of 300 300 Depends on the SSD Depends on the SSD jobs stored T capacity the job is capacity automatically deleted after printing PIN security No No Yes Yes if necessary Data after printing Stored Stored Deleted Stored Data at power off Deleted Deleted Deleted Stored SSD Necessary Unnecessary Unnecessary Necessary RAM disk may also be u
99. Container 000000 0c eee eee eee 1 3 Toner Container Replacement 4 7 2 Toner Kits Jiu sue epikse eae SRR ee a ee 7 2 TOP COVEN cce chen ohana rs e ean t ene ate iak 1 3 TOP Way sacc ieoi birate Licks nie ETOREPP RM 1 2 Transparency 00 0c eee eee eee A 21 Troubleshooting lisse 8 1 Index 3 Print quality problems esses 8 3 U Uninstalling Software selle 2 11 USB Interface 00000 0c eee eee 1 4 USB Keyboard 2 ccc cece eee eee eee ees A 15 USB KeyboardType eee ee eee eee 4 95 USB Memory s os eeeeieee tae wa heen nels vk DR OR ned A 14 Prini ses Dr 4 21 REMOVE mee xao s ERR am ea aa UR RC 4 28 USB Memory Slot 0 0 0 0 eee eee 1 2 WSB POM esl aperrebezerbe EE deeds x ERR d 1 4 User Login Setting ose 4 110 User Name lessslessel eee 4 56 W Waste Toner Box 000 00 e eee eee 1 2 REPIAGING 5i scere b eg he horas aoe 7 7 WIdG A4 fs ceieh tdi ne Saeed eee Oh bead ent 4 55 Wireless Network Interface Kit A 11 X XPS Fit to Page 1 ee eee 4 55 Index 4 QUALITY CERTIFICATE This machine has passed alquality contro linal inspection a gee Hi PASSIONATE PEOPLE FROM ALL OVER THE WORLD KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20
100. D on or Enhanced WSD over SSL on or gc td Li Function Settings E mail SMTP Protocol On EBgnesce information gt EE Status gt Py pocumen Box gt SMTP Server Name SMTP Port Number 25 1 65535 SMTP Server Timeout 10 seconds Authentication Protocol or SMTP Security or Make setings here Protocol 1 Launch your Web browser 2 Inthe address or location bar enter the machine s IP address or the host name Note Print the status page to check the machine s IP N address and the host name For details refer to Status Page Printing a printer s status page on page 4 12 3 Login with administrator privileges The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished case sensitive 4 From the Network Settings menu click Protocol 5 Set SMTP E mail TX to On in the Send Protocols 6 From the Function Settings menu click E mail 2 21 Preparation before Use 7 Enter SMTP and E mail Send Settings items Setting Description SMTP Set to send e mail from the machine SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings Check that SMTP Protocol is set to On If Off is set click Protocol and set the SMTP protocol to On SMTP Server Namet Enter the host n
101. DRIVER Status Monitor Fonts becomes eed manuals and resdme files Language 87 709 English Lj 2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc 6 Click Install KYOCERa itat Select the drca ouwant toad NY yada e cee ants ie Saar Add multiple devices and printing iiec Laences Use host rame a port name Select the features you want to use ith this device EE iSi Driver Package Language English E 2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Ine 2 8 Preparation before Use o _ Finished Your software is ready to use details Product Detail KX DRIVER Installed Status Monitor Installed FONTS Installed Uninstaller Installed dk Print a test page a Vg Enable event notification amp Vg Show Quick Print tab Custom Install The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using Custom Install Notice By using or installing the device drivers and software included in this package you agree to become bound by the terms and conditions of this license agreement View License Agreement 1 _ KYOCERA Finish the installation When Your software is ready to use appears you can use the software To print a test page click the Print a test page checkbox and select the machine Click Finish to exit the wizard If a system rest
102. Ec sis V Mo OPERATION GUIDE ECOSYS P4040dn W TIS S38 SS SSS A SSS SSS B ry KYOCERA Document Solutions Preface Thank you for purchasing the ECOSYS P4040dn This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine We recommend the use of our own brand supplies Please use our genuine toner containers which have passed rigorous quality control testing The use of non genuine toner containers may cause failure We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine A label is affixed to our genuine supplies as shown below T DIES T Z x Ocg gkuncera 2 Bielpcena edem IRS e Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Quick Guide Describes the procedures for installation of the machine Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Safety Guide ECOSYS P4040dn Describes the machine installation space cautionary space and other information Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Product Library disc
103. Front Right of the Printer 1eseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeene nennen nennen nanne nnns annes 1 2 Components at the Front Left of the Printer seseeeeeeeessssseeeeeenene innen nennen nnn nnne nn aadis 1 2 internal Components sosisini snanu 1 3 Components at the Rear of the Printer 5 eri ecaieeicsiciceeeecti esses a sl ct iv raia venue casn usan aes er Rs oc Gua pei 1 4 scum 1 5 2 Preparation before Use Changing Network Interface Parameters sissies aiina Aaaa aea aaea aniar 2 2 Prnang a SaS Page o cuo eucc Lu c ADMI eae aes LEM MU 2 6 Installing SOP Wale recs PeEE IE E M EIE 2 7 Datus MODHOL z n mo coc Liu D Ei MM MEE M rU 2 14 Command Center EX eie cioe ctt on ee ent tuse ar ripa ede el us lA E Dl Pec eM EI D ec EEd 2 18 PONT OMOR n2s ch uncle lut ic a U uu pee i 2 25 Energy Saver FUbDClOD eroe REIR IU cc cease M E MM oe ees Set ccna 2 26 Loading PRON eiie eee scene a res mE iet cme nr anes He iieri assente ies unc NESastest esae e ee resin e eMe eii UEE 2 28 3 Printing Printing from Applications m 3 2 Canceling a Printing Job t 3 2 Printer Driver Print Settings Screen oeciicu adi Leniiacqe si dcce sac adu da sddi i 1o c ce aad Ta cv a YA ado DH aiaiai ieii 3 3 Printing on Non standard Sized Paper iei ceci sisd ee dues raeicku sis aseo Saeco esr aio
104. HTTPS ICMP IPP IPPS KCP Kerberos LDAP LPD NetBIOS over TCP IP POP3 POP3 over SSL RawPort SLP SMTP SNMP SNMPv1 v2c v3 SNTP ThinPrint WINS Other Security protocols Operating conditions AppleTalk IPX SPX LLTD NetBEUI NetWare NDS Bindery EAP TLS EAP TTLS EAP FAST IKE PEAP SNMPv3 SSL TLS HTTPS 0 to 70 C 20 to 80 RH no condensation Storage conditions EMI conformity 20 to 50 C 20 to 90 96 RH no condensation FCC Class B USA CE EU VCCI Class B Japan A 29 Appendix Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 Option Item Description CPU SoC 88F6180 RAM 64 MBytes ROM 16 MBytes Wireless network IEEE802 11b Frequency 2 4GHz interf Em Transmission DS SS system Transmission 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps speed Channel 1 11ch IEEE802 11g Frequency 2 4GHz Transmission OFDM system Transmission 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps speed Channel 1 11ch IEEE802 11n Frequency 2 4GHz Transmission OFDM system Transmission Max 300Mbps speed Channel 1 11ch Authentication method Encryption mode Open System Shard Key WPA WPA2 None WEP 64bit 128bit TKIP AES When running in IEEE 802 11n only AES is supported Antenna Non directional antenna x 2 Printer interface eKUIO 5 0V Windows XP 32bit 64bit Vista 32bit 64bit 7 32bit Operating system 64bit Server 2003 32bit 64bit Serv
105. M File List Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted appears and the printer prints a list of the files held in the RAM disk Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu without printing the RAM disk file list SSD File List Printing a list of the files on the SSD This allows you to print a list of the files on the SSD IMPORTANT This is only displayed when the printer has an optional SSD installed and the drive is correctly formatted Print Yes Are you sure SSD File List N No In the Report Print menu press A or V to select SSD File List Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set SV the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted appears and the printer prints a list of the files held on the SSD Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu without printing the SSD file list SD Card FileList Printing a list of the files on an SD card This allows you to print a list of the files on an SD card IMPORTANT This message will be displayed only when the SD c
106. Mode 3 Press OK The Quiet Mode screen appears Quiet Mode lt 0 03 Off On 4 Press A or V to select On or Off 5 Press OK The Quiet Mode is set and the Function menu reappears Duplex Setting the duplex printing Set duplex printing For details refer to Duplex Setting the duplex printing on page 4 43 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press TREE 0K Function Right Select The Function menu appears uige oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press or V to select Duplex 3 Press OK The Duplex screen appears showing the list of available duplex printing modes Duplex Pag OK Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge 4 Press A or V to select the desired duplex printing mode The message display toggles through the following Off default Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge Selecting off disables duplex printing 5 Press OK The duplex printing mode is set and the Funct ion menu reappears 5 16 Document Box EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode Set EcoPrint mode For details refer to EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode on page 4 50 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Cheers id 0K Function Right Select The Function menu appears ule oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press A or V to select EcoPrint 3 Press OK The EcoPrint screen appears EcoPrint Ok 01Off On 4
107. N Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure This label is attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and is not in a user access area DANGER ATTENTION VORSICHT CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU KLASSE 3B LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE VARO EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALAKATSO S TEESEEN we QF RABKAKTM ITRETIRECH BERN IE SE IER AA GS SERARARER DET ER ARE HEE SE St AH CLASS 3B 7M MOBS AW AHAL H C ER 975238L y eas E LEERRIEH ANUT EU About the Operation Guide This Operation Guide has the following chapters Chapter 1 Machine Parts This chapter explains the names of parts Chapter 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations and settings necessary before use and the method for loading paper Chapter 3 Printing This chapter explains the method for printing from a computer Chapter 4 Operation Panel This chapter explains how to use the operation panel to configure the printer Chapter 5 Document Box This chapter
108. Name SSID 2 2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail Detail ow ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTU VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 8 1 2 1 2 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login J Password is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the Optional Network menu appears showing a list of available options Wireless Network Wireless network settings This selects the settings for Wireless network Note Wireless Network is only displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 is installed Inthe Optional Network menu press A or V toselectWireless Network Press OK The Wireless Network menu screen appears The following operations are possible ConnectionStatus Wireless network connection status check 4 66 Quick Setup Quick setup for the wireless network 4 67 Custom Setup Detailed settings for the wireless network 4 68 ConnectionStatus Wireless network connection status check When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 is installed you can check the status of the wireless network In the Wireless Network menu press A or V to select ConnectionStatus Press OK The Connec
109. OPORSTU VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 Pressing OK twice while file or folder details are displayed returns you to the Print File menu Remove Memory Removing the USB memory Allows you to remove a USB memory device Cannot remove the memory while in use 1 Inthe USB Memory menu press A or V to select Remove Memory 2 Press OK The printer is now ready for the USB memory to be removed and the message display returns to Ready to print IMPORTANT f the screen on the left appears the USB memory is still being used Wait until the relevant job e g printing from the USB memory has ended and then repeat the Remove Memory procedure 4 28 Operation Panel Counter Viewing the counter value This only displays the total number of pages printed You cannot change the displayed number Counter by Duplex by Combine 0 by Paper Size Exit 1 2 3 Press Menu Press or V to select Counter Press OK The Counter menu screen appears Press A or V to select by Paper Size by Duplex Or by Combine Press OK The number of printed pages for the function selected is displayed 4 29 Operation Panel Paper Settings This sets the paper size and type for the MP tray and cassettes from which paper is supplied The options available in Paper Settings are as follows MP Tray Set MP tray settings 4 30 Cassette 1 to 5 Set Sett
110. Option NIC optional Network Interface Kit 4 Press OK The NIC is set and the Optional Network menu reappears 4 75 Operation Panel Device Common Selecting Setting the common device Selects sets all the functions in this printer The options available in Device Common are as follows Language Selecting the message language 4 76 Def Screen Box Document Box default screen setting 4 77 Date Setting Date and time settings 4 78 Buzzer Alarm Buzzer setting 4 80 RAM Disk Setting Using the RAM disk 4 82 Format SSD Formatting the SSD 4 84 e Format SD Card Formatting the SD card 4 84 Display Bright Display brightness setting 4 84 Disp Backlight Display backlight setting 4 85 Error Handling Error detection setting 4 85 Timer Setting 4 87 Disp Status Log Display Status Log setting 4 94 USB KeyboardType USB keyboard type selection 4 95 TonerAlert Level Setting for the alert level for toner addition 4 95 IMPORTANT Def Screen Box Format SSD and Format SD Card only appear when the relevant option is installed 1 Press Menu 2 Press A or V to select Device Common 3 Press OK The Device Common menu appears showing a list of available options Device Common m Language Date Setting Buzzer Exit Language Selecting the message language You can select the language of the message display by following the pro
111. Press OK The Account Local screen appears Account Local lt lt Account Report Each Job Account Account List Exit Account Report Account report printing This enables you to print the total number of pages for all accounts as a Job Accounting list 1 Inthe Account Local menu press A or V to select Account Report 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Print Are you sure Press Yes Left Select Accepted appears and the printer Account Report prints the job accounting list Pressing No Right Select returns to the Account Local Yes No menu without printing the job accounting list Each Job Account Totals display by account Displays the number of pages printed for each of the currently selected accounts This enables you to check the following numbers for printed pages Total Combine None Combine 2in1 Combine 4in1 Duplex 1side Duplex 2side Note Before carrying out this operation register the Account in the Account List Account List operation on page SSI 4 124 1 Inthe Account Local menu press A or V to select Each Job Account 2 Press OK The Each Job Account menu appears with the accounts with the highest numbers listed first Each Job Account 0m 00000001 00000002 00000003 4 123 Operation Panel 3 Press A or V to select an account and then press OK The
112. Press A or V to select the EcoPrint mode 5 Press OK The EcoPrint mode is set and the Function menu reappears File Name Entry entering a file name Enter the file name The file name entered is displayed as the Job Name in the Job Status and Job Log 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Source menu press USENET r Function Right Select The Function menu appears ure oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press A or V to select File Name Entry 3 Press OK The File Name Entry screen appears File Name Entry Mm aoci 4 Enter the file name using the numeric keys Note Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters 5 Press OK The Additional Info screen appears Additional Info m 04 Job No Date Date Job No 6 Press A or V to select from the additional information that can be set for the file name The following settings can be selected None No additional information is added Date To add the date Job No To add the Job Number Job No Date To add the Job Number and date 5 17 Document Box Date Job No To add the date and Job Number 7 Press OK Register the file name and the Function menu reappears JobFinish Notice Settings for notification when jobs are finished The end of a job is notified using E mail Note To send E mail on this
113. Property menu screen appears The options available in NW User Property are as follows Off On Switching network user property acquisition On Off 4 115 Authenticat Type Authenticat type setting 4 115 Note Authenticat Type is only displayed when Kerberos has been set as the Server Type Server type selection on page 4 113 Off On Switching network user property acquisition On Off Set the NW User Property to On Off Authenticat Type Authenticat type setting Off On 0 03 Off On Set the authentication method PIN Login Authenticat Type Mm 01 Simple SASL In the NW User Property menu press A or V to select O f On Press OK The o On screen appears Press A or V to select On or Of f Press OK The NW User Property menu reappears In the NW User Property menu press A or V to select Authenticat Type Press OK The Authenticat Type screen appears Press A or V to select Simple or SASL Press OK The NW User Property menu reappears This sets whether or not to login using PIN When set to On you can login by entering PIN on the login screen Note This setting is only displayed when Netwk Authentic has been set as the Login Type Enabling of User SJ Login Administration on page 4 112 and This setting is only displayed when Ext has been set as the Server Type Server type selection on page 4 113 f x Pin Login pad OK 03 Off On
114. RR es A 24 Command Center RX 0020200 ce eee 2 18 COPIES cored x mon EROR i Roses Rita Busca oS Meee 4 52 COUNTED AMET Ln 4 29 CR Action ssssleleell ee 4 55 Custom BOX x2 xe reno Reus gba d dokn 5 3 Printer driver 2i rre r EE pe Pacte 5 30 Custom Paper Size Duplex printing llli 4 39 Pap r Siz6 ues eye ania aperea aperia ai 4 35 Paper weight llli 4 38 D Data Security uice keno koR dor bee oes 4 107 Security password llllllllllss 4 108 SSD initialization 2000000005 4 108 Data Security Kit 2 ee eee A 15 Date Setting ius zem Pete ee See eee Dee EROS RR Rs 4 78 DDNS i29 8b 0 eee eee koe eere oneris Glossary 1 Developer Unit 0 0 cece ee 1 3 DHCP x iexukDe Leere ae nne ES Glossary 1 Display Backlight llle 4 85 Display Brightness llle 4 84 Display Status Log 0 0 cee eee eee 4 94 Document BOX 0200 cee eee eee 5 2 Document Box Default Screen 4 77 Duplex Front Cover 0 0 cee eee eee 1 3 Duplex Printing sce RR Rx 4 43 Binding modes 0 cece cece 4 44 Permitted with custom paper 4 39 Duplex Unit Clearing paperjams lessen 8 19 E EcoPrint seos Ldebei ibd armes bids Lid de hehe 3 4 50 Emulation idees eae aka e pe e aeie Ad eee 4 45 Errorreport 2 2 eee eee 4 46 Energy Star Program 0 0 cee eee eee vi
115. SK WPA2 PSK Note wPA PSK and WPA2 PSK are only displayed when Infrastructure has been set as the Connection Mode Switch between connection modes on page 4 69 3 Press A or V to select the desired authentication method 4 Press OK The Custom Setup menu reappears Encryption Encryption settings This selects the encryption settings Note This setting is not displayed when the setting for Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting on page amp 4 70is set to use an authentication method other than Open Shared WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK using Utility 1 Inthe custom Setup menu press A or V to select Encryption 2 Press OK The Encryption screen appears Encryption lt OK The following operations are possible WEP Key Data Encryption Data Encryption setting 4 70 WEP Key WEP Key settings 4 71 exit f Note WEP Key is displayed when Netwk Authentic amp Network Authentication setting on page 4 70 is set to Open or Shared Preshared Key Preshared Key settings 4 71 Preshared Key is displayed when Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting on page 4 70 is set to WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Data Encryption Data Encryption setting This sets the encryption method 1 Inthe Encryption menu press A or V to select Data Encryption 4 70 Operation Panel WEP Data Encryption 0 0l Disable WEP Key
116. TIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Original SSLeay License Copyright 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are
117. Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray in the paper feed MP Tray Priority Mm Auto Feed Always 1 2 In the Print Settings menu press A or V to select MP Tray Priority Press OK The MP Tray Priority screen appears showing the available MP tray priority mode options Off The printer driver settings are followed Auto Feed If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray Always If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver Press A or V to select the desired MP tray priority mode Press OK The MP tray priority mode is set and the Print Settings menu reappears 4 42 Operation Panel Paper Feed Mode Setting the paper feed source This mode specifies how the paper should be fed once the paper feed source and paper type have been chosen If Auto is selected the printer searches for a paper feed source that matches the paper size and type and paper is then delivered from that source If Fi xedis selected and there is no matching paper feed source handling proceeds as specified by Paper MismatchforError Handling For details on paper feeding when Fixed is selected refer to Paper Mismatch Detection settings for paper size type errors when the paper source is fixed on page 4 86 The default setting is Auto To change the se
118. USB Memory 3 Press OK The USB Memory menu appears showing a list of available actions USB Memory m Print File Remove Memory Exit Print File Printing and checking the files in the USB memory This displays a list of the files and folders in the USB memory You can print the select file You can also view the details of the selected file or folder The options available in the Print File menu are as follows Display of File List 4 21 Print File Printing the selected file 4 22 Display of File List 1 Inthe USB Memory menu press A or V to select Print File 2 Press OK File List appears showing a list of the files and folders in oe Hs vm the USB memory Folder 1 If there are 4 or more files and folders pressing A or V repeatedly Folder 2 scrolls up or down through the list Detail 4 21 Operation Panel Press A or V to select a folder and then press OK fiFolder 1 n The folders and files in the selected folder are displayed BiFile 3 pdf 3Folder 11 Detail IMPORTANT Print File only shows the PDF TIFF JPEG and XPS files in the USB memory Up to 3 folder levels can be displayed Depending on the USB memory capacity and the number of files the list may take some time to appear Print File Printing the selected file You can use this to specify printing for files in the USB memory 1 Use the procedure described in Print Fil
119. access the Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings For more information refer to the Command Center RX User Guide This menu is not displayed when using USB connection Notification This sets the display of the Status Monitor For details refer to Status Monitor Notification Settings on page 2 17 www kyoceradocumentsolutions com Open our website Exit Exits the Status Monitor 2 16 Preparation before Use Status Monitor Notification Settings The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed Available events c o x Events Sleep Cover open Paper jam Add paper Add toner Toner low Not connected Printing completed Others Sound file Text to Speech Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs Available events Events Cover open Paper jam Add paper Sleep Add taner V Enables event notification Sound file Text to Speech Select Enable event notification If this setting is set to Off then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is executed Select an event to use with the text to speech function in Available events Click Sound file Text to Speech column Click the browse button to notify the event by sound file Note The available file format is WAV When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud ent
120. al 6 Press OK Select the font type and the Font menu reappears Font pad OK Font Type Font ID Courier Exit 7 Press A or V to select Font ID 8 Press OK The Font ID entry screen appears Font ID Pad OK 9 Press A or V to select the number of the desired font Note It is possible to check the numbers of the built in fonts amp N by outputting a Font List For details refer to Font List Printing a list of the printer s fonts on page 4 14 To select optional fonts other than those built in select Opt ion in step 5 You can perform this operation only when optional fonts are installed in the printer 4 47 Operation Panel The letter before the number indicates the location of the font as shown below I Internal font S Soft downloaded font M Fonts in optional SD card H Fonts in RAM disk or optional SSD 10 Press OK The default font is set and the Font menu reappears Selecting Regular or Dark Courier Letter Gothic Courier or Letter Gothic font thickness can be selected as Regular or Dark In the procedure below it is assumed that Courier is selected The procedure is the same for Letter Gothic Font Font Type Font ID Courier z vu Exit Courier Dark sm 01 Regular Changing the Default Font Size You can change the size of the default font If you selected a proportional font the character s
121. alled the Sleep Level Set menu is not displayed and the machine will enter the Quick Recovery mode 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Sleep Level Sets 2 Press OK The Sleep Level Set menu screen appears Sleep Level Set Mm Sleep Level Status Exit 3 Press A or V to select Sleep Level 4 Press OK The Sleep Level screen appears Sleep Level m Quick Recovery 2 Energy Saver 5 Press A or V to select Quick Recovery or Energy Saver 6 Press OK The sleep level is set and the Sleep Level Set Sleep Level Set mMm menu reappears Sleep Level Status When Energy Saver is set next go on to set whether or not to use Energy Saver mode for each function Exit 7 Press A or V to select Status Note Status is only displayed when Energy Saver is set 8 Press OK The Status menu screen appears Status Pa OK Network Next set whether or not to use Energy Saver mode for each function USB Cable Item Default Value Card Reader Exit Network Network interface setting On USB Cable USB interface setting On Card Reader ID card reader setting Off RAM Disk RAM Disk Mode setting Off Parallel Cable Parallel interface setting Off Note Card Reader is only displayed when the ID card J reader function has been activated Parallel Cable is only displayed when the optional Parallel Interface
122. ame Entry nm ABC Text Press OK A menu for the selected media is displayed Press A or V to select Name Entry Press OK The Name Entry screen appears Use the numeric keys to enter the name to display for the custom paper Note Up to 16 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press OK Register the name to display and the renamed custom paper screen reappears Reset Type Adj Resets customized settings This resets all the settings specified in Media Type Set Paper type settings on page 4 37 Reset Type Adjust Are you sure Yes No 1 2 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V toselect Reset Type Adj Press OK A confirmation screen appears Press Yes Left Select The message Completed appears and the Paper Settings menu reappears Pressing No Right Select returns to the Paper Settings menu without resetting the customized settings 4 40 Operation Panel Print Settings These settings specify the following printing parameters paper feed source paper feed mode duplex printing override A4 LTR emulation mode print quality and setting pagination The options available in Print Settings are as follows Paper Source Selecting the paper feed source 4 41 Auto Cass Change Auto Cassette Change setting 4 42 MP Tray Priority the settings for priority paper
123. ame or IP address of the SMTP server SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP Use the SMTP default port 25 SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds Authentication Protocol To use SMTP authentication enter the user information for authentication SMTP Security Set SMTP security Turn on SMTP Security in SMTP E mail TX on the Protocol Settings page POP before SMTP Specify the time in seconds until the connection to the POP server times outs Timeout This can be set when POP before SMTP is selected in Authentication Protocol Connection Test Tests to confirm that the settings are correct Domain Restriction To restrict the domains click the Domain List and enter the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected Restriction can also be specified by e mail address POP3 POP3 Protocol You don t need to set the following items when you only enable the function of Check I l sending e mail from the machine Set the following items if you want to enable eck Interva the function of receiving e mail on the machine For more information refer to Run once now Command Center RX User Guide Domain Restriction POP3 User Settings E mail E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When E mail Send size is greater than this value an error message appears and E mail sending is Settings cancelled Use this setting if you have set E mail Size Lim
124. ard is installed in the printer and properly formatted Print Yes Are you sure SD Card FileList N No In the Report Print menu press A or V to select SD Card FileList Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set SS the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK Press Yes Left Select Accepted appears and the printer prints a list of the files held on the SD card Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu without printing the SD card file list 4 15 Operation Panel Job Log History Sending Job Log History This sets the sending of the Job Log History Note When user login administration is enabled Job Log History is displayed when logged in with SV administrator authority To send E mail from this machine set the SMTP setting to On For details refer to the Protocol Detail Detailed settings for the network protocol on page 4 63 It is necessary to register a mail server For the method for setting the server refer to the section on Command Center RX on page 2 18 The options available in the Job Log History menu are as follows Auto Sending Automatic Sending of Job Log History 4 16 Send History Sending job log history 4 17 Destination Setting the destination 4 18 Subject Setting job log subject 4 19 Persona
125. ard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption The default setting is On 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select IPP 2 Press OK The IPP screen appears IPP i Off 3 Press or V to select whether IPP is enabled 4 Press OK The IPP setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears 4 100 Operation Panel SSL Setting SSL Server setting SSL Secure Sockets Layer refers to a protocol used to encrypt information sent and received over a network SSL can currently be used to encrypt data such as the WWW or FTP files widely used on the Internet so that privacy related information credit card numbers corporate secrets and other confidential information can be sent and received safely SSL servers use this protocol to authenticate servers and clients The options available in SSL Setting are as follows SSL SSL Server setting 4 101 PP over SSL SSL Server IPP over SSL setting 4 102 HTTPS SSL Server HTTPS setting 4 103 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select SSL Setting 2 Press OK The SSL Setting menu screen appea
126. ardstock Thick High Quality CUSTOM 1 to 8 D Press A or V to select the desired media type 6 Press OK The media type for the MP tray is set and the MP Tray Set menu screen reappears Cassette 1 to 5 Set Settings for the cassettes To print correctly on paper supplied from the cassettes use the procedure below to set the paper size and media type Set the cassette according to the paper size Setting the standard paper size 4 32 Setting the non standard paper size 4 34 The options available in Cassette 1 to 5 Set menu are as follows Media Type Setting the cassette paper type 4 33 Other Paper Size Setting the Paper Size from the Operation Panel 4 34 Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size 4 35 Setting the standard paper size To set the standard sizes A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 and B5 R the following operations are necessary Setting the cassette paper size 4 33 Media Type Setting the cassette paper type 4 33 4 32 Operation Panel Setting the cassette paper size To set the standard sizes for the paper cassette load the paper and turn the paper size dial so that the size of the paper you are going to use appears in the paper size window To adjust the paper width guides and the paper length guide of the paper cassette refer to Loading Paper into the Cassette on page 2 28 If the PF 4100 optional paper feeder is installed use the same procedure to load paper into the paper f
127. art message appears restart the computer by following the screen prompts This completes the printer driver installation procedure Insert the Product Library disk Note Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged SS on with administrator privileges If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel If the autorun screen is displayed click Run setup exe If the user account management window appears click Yes Allow Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement Click Accept Select Custom Install tab SERRE NY Quisysca a device and ite diver Read manuals and readme file Tse reer toes dine end oe KK DRIVER Ps DRVER 1 4181 T sums 2014 KYOCERA Dos cumant Solutions Ine amp Custom Install ES nad multiple devices and printing ueiniet a OS tmu pant CI Documents Read manuals and resime file Language Products to Install O items re zz ET nes C 1235 1141812 ter T VGN Stands asos Stand Version 373211 sums a English 2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Ine Select the device to be installed and click the arrow button to move it to the Products to Install list The following buttons are available This button is used to switch the display between icon and text display
128. arts Internal Components o o 100 FWD oon U NaO Top Cover Toner Container Lock Lever Front Cover Duplex Front Cover Developer Unit Registration Roller Paper Width Guides Cassette Cover Paper Width Adjusting Tab Paper Length Guide Paper Length Adjusting Tab Paper Size Dial Machine Parts Components at the Rear of the Printer Option Interface Slot Network Interface Connector USB Port For Card Authentication Kit USB Interface Connector Interface Cover Power Cord Connector Cover Fuser Cover Rear Cover Power Cord Connector o o 100 FWD Machine Parts Operation Panel o o 100 5 0oN h h R a fF ON O amp O Ready Indicator Data Indicator Attention Indicator Message Display Left Select Key Logout Key Menu Key Back Key Numeric Keys Right Select Key Cancel Key Arrow Keys OK Key Clear Key Document Box Key O Ready Data Attention 1 5 11 Machine Parts 1 6 2 Preparation before Use This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Changing Network Interface Parameters 1 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseee nennen enne nnne n nnn nn natnm n annt nnns 2 2 Printing a Status Pages C
129. ata is intended to be used anonymously 7 2 Maintenance Replacing the Toner Container This section explains how to replace the toner containers When replacing the toner container always replace the waste toner box at the same time If this box is full the printer may be damaged or contaminated by the waste toner that may spill over the box A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the Toner Container Dangerous sparks may cause burns IMPORTANT Before replacing the toner container remove the paper on the MP tray Note You do not have to turn printer power off before starting the replacement Any data that may be processing in amp the printer will be deleted if you turn the printer power off 1 Open the top cover 2 Turn the lock lever to the unlock position Lock lever 3 Carefully remove the old toner container from the printer 7 3 Maintenance 4 Put the old toner container in the plastic bag contained in the toner kit and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal Plastic Bag 5 Take the new toner container out of the toner kit Maintenance 6 Shake the new toner container at least 10 times as shown in the figure in order to distribute the toner evenly inside the container Do not press too firmly on the center of the toner container or touch the toner feed slot IMPORTANT Do not touch the part of the toner container indicated on the diagram
130. ation Do not turn off the power supply whilst the deletion is ongoing If the power switch off during the deletion then the deletion will automatically be performed when the power is switched back on but a complete operation cannot be guaranteed The data deleted is as listed below Job settings Machine settings Network settings Certificates User settings user list document boxes Machine administration job logs job accounting Note It is possible to check the status of data sanitization implementation on the Status page For details refer to amp N Status Page Printing a printer s status page on page 4 12 1 Inthe Data Security menu press A or V to select DataSanitization 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Sanitizing the sanitize the data data appears and the data sanitization begins Are you sure This process will Note When an optional SSD is installed the printer take a while SJ automatically restarts before data sanitization Yes No Pressing No Right Select returns to the Data Security menu without sanitizing the data 4 When the data sanitization is finished Complet is displayed Press sanre ring Ehe dates OK Right Select and turn the power switch off Main Memory Complet SSD Complet Note It is possible to check the result of data sanitization on amp N the Status page For details
131. ay 4 Press OK The Paper Size screen appears listing the paper sizes that can be supplied from the MP tray The available paper sizes are as follows A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A6 B4 B5 E B6 Folio Envel Envel Envel Envel Envel Envel Envel ope ope ope ope ope ope ope 110 9 6 Monarch DL C5 C4 216x340mm 8K 16K Legal Ledger Letter R Letter Statement Executive Oficio II ISO B5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Custom 5 Press A or V to select the desired paper size 6 Press OK The paper size for the MP tray is set and the MP Tray Set menu screen reappears You can use this to set the paper type that can be supplied from the MP tray The default setting is PLAIN For more information about paper types that you can feed from the MP tray refer to Paper on page A 16 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select MP Tray Set 4 31 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The MP Tray Set menu screen appears MP Tray Set m Paper Size Media Type Exit 3 Press A or V to select Media Type 4 Press OK TheMedia Type screen appears listing the media types that can be supplied from the MP tray Media Type m Transparency The available media types are as follows Preprinted Plain Transparency Preprinted Labels Bond Recycled Vellum Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched Envelope C
132. ay The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 plain paper 80 g m or up to 20 sheets of A3 plain paper 80 g m For details of the supported paper sizes refer to Selecting the Right Paper on page A 18 For the paper type setting refer to Media Type Paper type setting for the MP tray on page 4 31 IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled paper always specify the media type setting If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows A4 plain paper 80 g m 100 sheets A3 plain paper 80 g m 20 sheets Hagaki 1 sheet Envelope DL Envelope C4 Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Youkei 4 Youkei 2 5 sheets Thick paper 5 sheets Note When you load custom size paper select Custom size by referring to Paper Size Paper size setting for the MP tray on page 4 30 When you use special paper such as envelopes or thick paper select the media type by referring to Media Type Paper type setting for the MP tray on page 4 31 1 Fan the media paper transparencies then tap it on a level surface to avoid media jams or skewed printing 2 Pullthe MP tray towards you until it stops 2 32 Preparation before Use 3 Pull out the support tray section of the MP tray Support Tray Section of the MP Tray 4
133. b Account menu screen Login is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator 4 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name 0 Login User Name entry screen is displayed ABC Text 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User SV Name is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 6 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Login User Name wa 4000 Login Password Login 7 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Login Password Ui ABC Text 8 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK nn Name m The login screen reappears Login Password Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login Password is 4000 Login For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 A 9 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name User Job Account lt gt fi and Login Password are correct the User Job Account menu O1 j j User login Set screen appears Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 10 Press or V to select Unknown ID Job 4 128 Operation Panel
134. bcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 7 Maintenance This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Toner Gontainer Replacement me Replacing Ihe Waste Toner BOX sisiiiissiso iirst anae KPd MM FA nuUa Ula FURPI MUN MM LOEO Mn NIME L C cU iaaii Cleaning the Printer 7 1 Maintenance Toner Container Replacement The printer displays messages at two stages of toner usage When the printer becomes low on toner the printer displays the message Toner is running out as the first caution Note the replacement is not always necessary at this stage Prepare the new toner kit f you ignore the above message and continue printing the printer displays the message Replace toner just before the toner is used up The printer will stop printing The toner container must be replaced immediately Refer to Replacing the Toner Container on page 7 3 Frequency of Toner Container Replacement The life of the toner containers depends on the amount of toner required to accomplish your printing jobs According to ISO IEC 19752 and EcoPrint switched off the toner container can print as follows A4 Letter paper is assumed 15 000 images Starter Toner Container The toner container packed with the new printer is a starter toner container The starter toner container lasts an average of 7 500 images Toner Kits Toner Container Waste Toner Box Plastic waste bags f
135. be used with the activation time for energy saving mode set to the default setting vii Energy Star ENERGY STAR We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program ENERGY STAR is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming By purchasing ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR qualified products customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during product use and cut energy related costs EN ISO 7779 Der h chste Schalldruckpegel betr gt 70 dB A oder weniger gem EN ISO 7779 EK1 ITB 2000 Das Gerat ist nicht fur die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C Humidity 15 to 80 96 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight Avoid locations with vibrations Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations
136. bsites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption Job Box The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer s operation panel KPDL Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 Multi Purpose MP Tray Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki or labels NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services NetWare Novell s network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems Outline font With outline fonts character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts since the characters are defined with outlines repr
137. cedure given below You can optionally download messages in other languages Contact your service technician for information 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Language 2 Press OK The Language screen appears showing the list of Language m languages Deutsch The available languages are as follows Fran ais English Deutsch Fran ais Espa ol Italiano Nederlands PyccKun Portugu s 4 76 Operation Panel Def Screen Box J o1 Custom Box Job Box 1 2 The optional languages are as follows Optional language Message display Turkish T rk e Greek EAAnvIK Polish Polski Czech Cesky Hungarian Magyar Finnish Suomi Hebrew n a x Arabic els ji Swedish Svenska Danish Dansk Norwegian Norsk Romanian Rom n If you are using one of the optional languages it is displayed in place of Portugu s Press A or V to select the desired language Press OK The language is set and the Device Common menu reappears Def Screen Box Document Box default screen setting Select the screen to be displayed when Document Box is pressed In the Device Common menu screen press A or V to select Def Screen Box Press OK The Def Screen Box screen appears Press A or V to select either Custom BOX or Job BOX as the default screen Press OK The default screen is set and the Device Common menu reappears
138. characters can be printed Any double byte characters included in a file name appear as corrupted text in the message list Also when the file is printed an error message appears and printing fails For information on printing PDF files stored in USB memory refer to USB Memory USB memory selection on page 4 21 For information on supported USB memory devices contact your service technician Use the faceup output tray when you wish paper to be stacked with the printed side facing up reverse order To install the faceup output tray perform the following procedures 1 Open the faceup output tray 2 Install the paper stopper according to the size of paper to be used 3 Install the faceup output tray on the rear of the printer Appendix Other Options Data Security Kit E The security kit overwrites data which is no longer necessary to make it difficult to restore it Also when data is stored on the SSD it encrypts the data then writes it It is not possible to decode read anything other than in normal outputs and operations so this provides greater security should it become necessary Card Authentication Kit B Itis possible to perform user authentication with an ID card To perform authentication with an ID card it is necessary to first register the ID card information in the list of registered users For the method for registration refer to the Card Authentication Kit B Operation Guide USB Keyboard
139. characters can be entered For details on amp N entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 24 Operation Panel 5 Press OK The Additional Info screen appears Additional Info m 4 Job No Date Date Job No 6 Press or V to select from the additional information that can be set for the file name The following settings can be selected None No additional information is added Date To add the date Job No To add the Job Number Job No Date To add the Job Number and date Date Job No To add the date and Job Number 7 Press OK Register the file name and the Function menu reappears JobFinish Notice Setting for notification when jobs are finished Notification that a job has finished is sent by E Mail Note To send E mail from this machine set the SMTP setting to On For details refer to the Protocol Detail amp Detailed settings for the network protocol on page 4 63 Itis necessary to register a mail server For the method for setting the server refer to the section on Command Center RX on page 2 18 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press TE XD Function Right Select The Function menu appears ure oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press A or V to select JobFinish Notice 3 Press OK The JobFinish Notice screen appears JobFinish Notice Mm 01Off On 4 Press A or V to
140. cific box number and type the box number and password Select Prompt for box number and click OK When the Custom Box dialog box appears type a box number from the Defined custom boxes list If a password was set type the password Select Display box number list and click OK When the Custom Box dialog box appears select a box from the list If a password was set type the password This can be selected if Shared box is selected in the SSD Settings dialog box Select Verify box number for each login user and click OK When the Custom Box dialog box appears type a box number To include a password select Require password and type the password This can be selected when Shared box is selected in the SSD Settings dialog box 4 Click OK to return to the Print dialog box Job Box Quick Copy Select Quick copy Proof and Hold Select Proof and hold Private Print Select Private print and set the Access code Stored Job Select Job storage Set the Access code if necessary Note For information on how to use the printer driver software refer to the Printer Driver User Guide 5 30 6 Status Menu This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Displaying the Status NSIS UN E E 6 2 dioc Dm 6 3 JOD LOG
141. cification SD SDHC Memory Card An SD Memory Card is a removable storage media It is nonvolatile semiconductor memory where the data remains even when the power supply is cut The maximum memory capacity is 2 GB SDHC memory cards are a higher specification of SD memory cards These memory cards have bigger capacities than SD memory cards and have a guaranteed minimum transfer speed As the file system was changed to FAT32 up to a maximum of 32 GB is supported Sleep mode This mode is provided to save power It is activated when the machine is not used for a preset period of time In this mode power is reduced to the minimum The default setting can be changed SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers SSD Solid State Drive An SSD is a media for data storage using flash memory Whereas HDD generally use magnetic discs as the storage media SDD are a storage media which use semiconductors Compared with HDD on which a head reads from the magnetic disk the merits of SSD are that they can read data at higher speeds they are resistant to vibrations and they do not require motors which mean that they consume less electricity and there is no drive noise Status page This lists machine conditions such as the machine s memory the total number of prints a
142. cled Paper s osse e gli gne A 24 Reduced Print 02000 cece eee oidd 4 52 Report Print score die eee ated inen 4 10 S SDC iu iis eh ieee Miah eU Ru RUD xS Glossary 3 lieu D 4 84 les EE 4 98 l F bloCk ilzdgi nex eben vied repEd rp 4 104 NI dp T 4 99 Service Setting 0 0 cece eee 4 132 Specifications 6 0 ee eee A 26 DOD sce aoe ear EE eee A 10 Glossary 3 FORMAL Saeco sane ole tdv are IER AUR 4 84 Status Menu 0000 cee eee 6 1 JOD NOG D 6 4 JOD STAS usc cocci a te UR Ze EDU UR a ede 6 3 Network nero Eon Re RU LEE RUD ETRRURUR DE 6 5 Option network 0 00000 eee eee eee 6 5 USB keyboard 2 2 cece eee 6 5 Wireless network 0000 00 cece eee eee 6 6 Stat s Page s osse e Rena tes 4 12 T Thick Paper 00000 c eee eee eee A 24 ThinPrint Option lille A 15 TIFF JPEG Size 00 02000 eee eee 4 55 Timer Setting ie cvee osne RR dee 4 87 Auto error clear 2 2 2 000 cece eee 4 92 Auto panel reset 0 0 00000 cece eee eee 4 88 Error clear timer 000 0 c eee eee eee eee 4 93 Form feed timeout 02 0 0s 4 93 Panel reset timer lille eee eeeee 4 88 Power off rule 22 0 cee eee eee 4 91 Power off timer 2 0 0 00 cee eee eee eee 4 92 Sleep level 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee 4 89 Sleep timer 2 0 000 cece ee eee 4 91 Toner Alert Level 000000 cece eee 4 95 Toner
143. coating Such papers may cause paper jams or other faults The cassettes can hold paper with weight between 60 120 g m Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 120 g m in the cassettes Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 120 g m Place the cassette in a stable place such as on a desk when loading paper 1 Fan the media paper transparencies then tap it on a level surface to avoid media jams or skewed printing 2 Pull out the cassette from the machine Cassette 9 IMPORTANT When pulling out the cassette from the machine ensure that it is supported and does not fall out 3 Open the cassette cover 2 28 Preparation before Use Paper Width Guides Paper Width Adjusting Tab Asp B5D AL B49 fap ie LTR LTREP LGLD LGRD Paper Length Adjusting Tab 4 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette Press the paper width adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required Note Paper sizes are marked on the cassette 5 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required 2 29 Preparation before Use If you are going to use paper that is longer than A4 R pull the cassette out until it stops at the back and then adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required Note Paper sizes are marked on the cassette ASD BSU AD Bap Asp ie LTRD LRG GLD LGRD BN 6 Turn th
144. col is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour 1 Inthe rPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select Bonjour 4 60 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The Bonjour screen appears Bonjour m Off 3 Press or V to select whether automatic detection is enabled 4 Press OK The automatic detection setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears IPv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission 1 Inthe TCP 1P Settings menu press A or V to s
145. connection with the access point is started When it is necessary to enter an encryption key the WEP Key entry screen or Preshared Key entry screen appears When a WEP Key must be entered Enter the WEP Key using the numeric keys and press OK Up to 26 characters can be entered For details on entering ABC ZT characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Text EP Key pad OK E When a Preshared Key must be entered Preshared Key m x E Enter the Preshared Key using the numeric keys and press OK Note The number of characters is between 8 and 64 For ABC amp details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Text Method on page A 2 Push Button Connect using Push Button When the access point supports the automatic wireless network setup button you can configure the wireless settings automatically using the button and the panel operation of the printer 1 Inthe Quick Setup menu press A or V to select Push Button 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Press the push button on access point and then press Next Next 4 67 Operation Panel 3 Press the automatic wireless network setup button on the access point 4 Press Next Right Select The message Connecting appears and the connection with the access point starts PIN Device Connect using a PIN code for the Wireless Network Interface Kit The connection
146. consumption while in a waiting state the device comes equipped with an energy saving control function for switching to a Sleep Mode where power consumption is automatically reduced to a minimum after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used For details refer to Energy Saver Function on page 2 26 Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time section There are two sleep modes Quick Recovery and Energy Saver The default setting is Energy Saver mode Quick Recovery Mode The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver Mode The machine automatically recovers and prints when a job is detected Energy Saver Mode Makes it possible to reduce energy consumption even further than with Quick Recovery Mode Power Off Timer If the printer is not used while in sleep mode the power automatically turns off The Power Off Timer is used to set the time until the power turns off The factory setting for the time until the power turns off is 1 hour Duplex Printing This printer includes duplex printing as a standard function For example by printing two single sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a duplex printing it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more inf
147. d 30 000 MB 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Usage Detail E Restrict Usage Restrict 6 9 200MB Change 2 Press Change Right Select The Usage Restrict screen Usage Restrict mMm appears 1 30000 f IESU E 3 Enter the limit value using the numeric keys A or V 4 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears Auto File Del Setting for automatic file deletion This automatically deletes the documents that have been saved after a fixed period Set to on for the automatic deletion and then enter the number of days that the documents will be stored Between 1 and 31 days can be entered Set to of f if automatic deletion will not be used 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Auto File Detail Ul Del Auto File Del 7 9 L Off Change 2 Press Change Right Select The auto File Del menu Screen appears Auto File Del Pata OK Off On 3 Press A or V to select Of On Document Box Off On Ok 03 off 02 On Auto File Del Ui Off On Period Period 1 3L E cey s Overwrite Set Setting of overwrite storage Detail KES Un Overwrite Set 8 9 Permit Change OverwriteSetting f 01 Permit Prohibit Detail Un Del afterPrint 9 9 Off Change 9 Press OK The o On screen appears
148. d by the instructions in the installation software This completes the printer driver installation If a USB connection is used the machine is automatically recognized and connected If an IP connection is used the settings below are required eoo 7 n System Preferen nd click Printer anners eeen Open Syste eferences and clic ters amp Sc c Ye M Hio Oa E 8 es aGooeossu A 9 OG G ae l Flash Player FlipMac Java 2 12 Preparation before Use eeo LaLe showa a Printer ERE Idle Last Used Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies Location Kind Status Idle Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used Default paper size A4 WW Ea ms e Default Fax IP Windows Kind Bonjour Name Location ooe LA ALTE DeGut rax IP windows Search Na Setting up Ky Make sure your printer s options are accurately shown here so you can take full advantage of them Paper Feeders Not installed Optional Disk RAM disk L Cancel eeo LaLe Show all_ Q e idie e Idle Last Used Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies Location Status Idle J Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used Bj Default paper size A4 8 Click the
149. desired media type 6 Press OK The media type for the cassette is set and the Cassette Set menu screen reappears 4 33 Operation Panel Setting the non standard paper size To set the non standard sizes sizes other than A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 and B5 R the following operations are necessary Selecting the Size Dial Setting 4 34 Other Paper Size Setting the Paper Size from the Operation Panel 4 34 Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size 4 35 Media Type Setting the cassette paper type 4 36 Selecting the Size Dial Setting 1 Pullthe cassette out ofthe printer and set the paper size dial to Other For details refer to step 1 in Setting the cassette paper size on page 4 33 2 Adjust the paper guides in the cassette to the size of the paper to be used for printing and load the paper into the cassette Other Paper Size Setting the Paper Size from the Operation Panel Use the operation panel to set the size of paper loaded in the cassette on the printer Note When Custom is selected it is possible to enter the paper size For details refer to Custom PaperSize amp Setting a Custom Paper Size on page 4 35 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select the paper cassette assigned to Other on the Size Dial 2 Press OK The Cassette Set menu screen appears Cassette 1 Set m shows the number of the cassette installed in the printer 1 to 5 Other Paper Size E
150. desired server type Press OK The server type is set and the Netwk Auth Set menu reappears Inthe Netwk Auth Set menu press A or V toselect Host Name Press OK The Host Name screen appears Enter the host name using the numeric keys Note Up to 64 characters can be entered For details on amp N entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 To enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets e g 3ae3 9a0 cd05 b1d2 28a 1fc0 a1 10ae 140 Press OK The Domain screen appears Referring to Domain Name Selecting of Domain Name on page 4 114 select the domain name for the authentication server Press OK The host name is registered and the Netwk Auth Set menu reappears has been set as the Server Type Server type selection on page 4 In the Netwk Auth Set menu press A or V to select Port Press OK The Port screen appears 4 113 Operation Panel 3 Enter the port number using the numeric keys Note If the port number is registered as a blank field the amp default port number will be enabled 4 Press OK The port number is registered and the Netwk Auth Set menu reappears Domain Name Selecting of Domain Name Enter the domain name for the authentication server Note This setting is only displayed when NTLM or Kerberos has been set as the Server Type Server type amp N selection on page 4 113 1 Inthe Netwk Auth Set menu press A or V
151. dress using the numeric keys Note Up to 128 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 7 Press OK Dest Confirm m exit 8 To delete the destination press OK Eq aaa bbb com m Edit Delete 9 Press A or V to select Delete 10 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Delete Are you sure gt EyJaaatbbb com Yes No 11 To proceed with deleting the destination press Yes LeftSelect Completed appears and the account is deleted Pressing No Right Select returns to the Dest Confirm menu without deleting the destination Subject Setting job log subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E mail 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press A or V to select Subject 2 Press OK The Subject screen appears Subject Dn ABC Text 4 19 Operation Panel Enter the subject using the numeric keys Note Up to 60 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press OK The subject is set and the Job Log History menu reappears Personal Info Personal information setting Select whether to include personal information in the job log Personal Info 01 Include Exclude m 1 2 Inthe Job Log History menu press A or V to
152. driver The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel ensuring confidentiality of the print job In the stored job mode access codes are not mandatory but can be set on the printer driver Then the access code must be entered on the operation panel to print a stored job Print data will be stored in the SSD or RAM disk after printing Note When a print job is stored in a job Box for private print the power consumption is more than that of the sleep mode Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for the driver settings The following operations are possible Printing a Private Stored Job 5 25 Printa File 5 26 Deleting a Private Stored Job 5 27 Delete a File 5 27 Printing a Private Stored Job 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Private Stored 2 Press OK The Private Stored screen appears listing the user Private Stored id o names for stored jobs amp User 02 amp User 03 3 Press A or V to select the user name you entered in the printer driver 5 25 Document Box 4 Press OK The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the selected user name amp User 01 Ui fA Data 01 ut Data 02 1 5 Press A or V to select the name of the job to be printed When Select Right Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file Select the checkmarked file and press Sel
153. dy status press OK KPDL error Press OK Current print processing cannot continue because of occurrence of KPDL error To print out an error report display KPDL Error Rpt from the menu system and select On Press OK to resume printing You can abandon printing by pressing Cancel If Auto Error Clear is set to On printing will be automatically resumed after a preset period of time Limit exceeded You cannot add any more The added box exceeded the maximum number of box Delete it if there is a unnecessary box For details refer to Custom Box operation Box creation editing and deletion on page 5 4 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Load paper in cassette d A4 v4 Different paper size is set Check paper size Load paper in cassette A4 Plain The size of the paper in the cassette and the paper size on the paper size dial are not the same Check the paper size The paper cassette matching the paper size and paper type of the print job is empty Load paper into the paper cassette as displayed in place of Press OK to resume printing If you want to print from a different paper source press A1t Left Select to display Alternative and you can change the source for paper feeding You can abandon printing by pressing Cancel Load paper in MP tray A4 Plain There is no paper casse
154. e 7 After you finish installing the memory modules reinstall the main controller board and fasten it with screws Removing a Memory Module To remove a memory module remove the main controller board then carefully push out the two socket clamps Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove A 7 Appendix Checking Expansion Memory After installing expansion memory use the following method to check that it is correctly installed 1 Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select Status Page 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed 3 Press Yes Left Select Accepted appears and the printer Prints prints the status page Are you sure gt Status Page Check the amount of memory with the printed status page If the memory addition has been done correctly the total amount of Yes No memory will have increased The amount of memory when shipped from the factory is 256 MB A 8 Appendix General Description of Options SD SDHC Memory Card The printer is equipped with a slot for an SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB and an SD memory card with a maximum size of 2 GB An SD SDHC memory card is useful for storing fonts macros and overlays This enables high speed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function Also you can use the Job Box functions For details refer to Job Box on page 5 21 Reading the SD SDHC Memory Card Once inserted i
155. e No responsibility is assumed for defects in the printer s firmware contents of its read only memory This guide any copyrightable subject matter sold or provided with or in connection with the sale of the page printer are protected by copyright All rights are reserved Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide any copyrightable subject matter without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc is prohibited Any copies made of all or part of this guide any copyrightable subject must contain the same copyright notice as the material from which the copying is done Regarding Trade Names PRESCRIBE KPDL and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries PCLis a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation AppleTalk Bonjour Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries All European language fonts installed in this machine are used
156. e Printing and checking the files in the USB memory on page 4 21 to display a list of the files in the folder containing the file you want to print 2 Press A or V to select the file you want to print 3 Press OK The Copies menu screen appears Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set amp the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK 4 To print 2 or more copies Use the numeric keys or press A or V to E m set the number of copies to be printed 1 999 copies Function 5 Press OK The Paper Source menu screen appears Paper Source OK Note Function Right Select can be pressed to A4 Plain SV change the print settings For details refer to Print Function i A3 Plain Settings on page 4 23 Function 6 Press A or V to select the tray containing the paper you want to use 7 Press OK The message Accepted appears and printing begins Accepted 4 22 Operation Panel Print Function Settings When printing the print settings can be changed Options available in Print Function Settings are as follows Quiet Mode Selecting the Quiet Mode 4 23 Duplex Setting the duplex printing 4 23 EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode 4 24 File Name Entry Entering a file name 4 24 JobFinish Notice Setting for notification when jobs are finished 4 25 Encrypted PDF Entering the PDF passw
157. e IP Address Entering the IP address If DHCP is set to of f enter the IP Address manually 15 Press or V to select IP Address 16 Press OK The IP Address screen appears IP Address u EB gt o o 17 Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the IP address You can set any value between 000 and 255 Increase or reduce the figures by pressing A or V Use lt and gt to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted 18 Press OK The IP address is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu IPv4 Setting n reappears DHCP Auto IP IP Address Exit Entering the Subnet Mask When DHCP is set to off enter the Subnet Mask manually 19 Press or V to select Subnet Mask 20 Press OK The Subnet Mask screen appears Subnet Mask ui EB o o 21 Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the subnet mask You can set any value between 000 and 255 The method for entering is the same as for the IP Address 22 Press OK The subnet mask setting is stored and the IPv4 CRI Ui Setting menu reappears Subnet Mask Default Gateway 06 Bonjour 06 Bonj Exit Preparation before Use Entering the Default Gateway When DHCP is set to off enter the Default Gateway manually 23 Press or V to select Default Gateway 24 Press OK The Default Gateway screen appears Default Gateway 0m EB gt o o 25 Use the numer
158. e Paper Size Dial so that the size of the paper you are going Paper Size Dial to use appears in the Paper Size Window Note When the Paper Size Dial is set to Other the paper size must be set into the printer on the operation panel Refer to Cassette 1 to 5 Set Settings for the cassettes on page 4 32 Paper Size Window 2 30 Preparation before Use T Load the paper in the cassette IMPORTANT Load the paper with the print side facing down Before loading the paper be sure that it is not curled or folded Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit see the illustration on the left Set the stack of paper so that it is under the clips see the illustration on the left The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams 8 Close the cassette cover 9 Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the machine Push it straight in as far as it will go Note If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period amp protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 10 Select the media type plain recycled etc loaded in the cassette Refer to Media Type Setting the cassette paper type on page 4 33 Preparation before Use Loading Paper into the MP Multi Purpose Tr
159. e as follows PCL6 IBM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 Line Printer KPDL KPDL Auto Press A or V to select the desired emulation Press OK The emulation is set and the Emulation Set menu reappears 4 45 Operation Panel KPDL Error Rpt Printing KPDL errors The printer can print error descriptions when printing error occurs during KPDL emulation The default setting differs depending on the countries or regions IMPORTANT This setting only appears when KPDL or KPDL Auto is selected for the emulation Emulation Set m Emulation KPDL Error Rpt Alt Emulation Exit KPDL Error Rpt m 01Off On 1 2 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Emulation Set Press OK The Emulation Set menu screen appears Press A or V to select KPDL Error Rpt Press OK The KPDL Error Rpt screen appears Press A or V to select whether error reports are printed Press OK The error report print setting is set and the Emulation Set menu reappears Alt Emulation Alternative Emulation for KPDL Emulation The KPDL AUTO emulation enables the printer to automatically change the emulation mode according to the data received when printing IMPORTANT This setting only appears when KPDL Auto is selected for the emulation Emulation Set mm Emulation KPDL Error Rpt Alt Emulation Exit Alt E
160. e bond paper refer to Paper Specifications on page A 16 The preprinted ink must be able to withstand the heat of fusing during the printing process and must not be affected by silicone oil Do not use paper with any kind of surface treatment such as the type of paper commonly used for calendars Recycled Paper Select recycled paper that meets the same specifications as the white bond paper except for whiteness refer to Paper Specifications on page A 16 Note Before purchasing recycled paper test a sample on the machine and check that the printing quality is amp satisfactory A 24 Appendix Paper Type The printer is capable of printing under the optimum setting for the type of paper being used Setting the paper type for the paper source from the printer s operation panel will cause the printer to automatically select the paper source and print in the mode best suited to that type of paper A different paper type setting can be made for each paper source including the MP tray Not only can preset paper types be selected but it is also possible for you to define and select customized paper types Refer to Media Type Set Paper type settings on page 4 37 The following types of paper can be used Yes Can be stored No Cannot be stored Paper Source xis MP Tray Cassette HEU Paper Weight Duplex Path Plain Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Transparency Yes No No Extra Heavy No Preprinted Y
161. e carrier sheet until after printing is finished Acceptable Unacceptable 4 Top sheet Carrier sheet 3 The table below lists the specifications for adhesive label paper Item Specification Weight of top sheet 44 to 74 g m 12 to 20 Ib ream Basis weight 104 to 151 g m 28 to 40 Ib ream Thickness of top sheet 0 086 to 0 107 mm 3 9 to 4 2 mils Composite thickness 0 115 to 0 145 mm 4 5 to 5 7 mils Moisture content 4 to 6 composite A 22 Appendix Postcards Fan the stack of postcards and align the edges before loading them in the MP tray Make sure the postcards you are going to set are not curled Feeding curled postcards may cause paper jams Some postcards have rough edges on the back those are created when the paper is cut In this case put the postcards on a flat place and rub the edges with for example a ruler to smooth them Envelopes Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print side up Note Do not load paper above the load limits located on the amp paper width guide of the MP tray Since the composition of an envelope is more complex than that of ordinary paper it is not always possible to ensure consistent printing quality over the entire envelope surface Normally envelopes have a diagonal grain direction Refer to Paper Grain on page A 20
162. e disposal Old Waste Toner Box Plastic Bag 5 Open the cap of the new waste toner box New Waste Toner Box 7 7 Maintenance New Waste Toner Box 6 Insert the new waste toner box as shown in the figure When the box is set correctly it will snap into place 7 Make sure that the waste toner box is correctly inserted and close the left cover After replacing the toner containers and the waste toner box clean the paper transfer unit For instructions refer to Cleaning the Printer on page 7 9 7 8 Maintenance Cleaning the Printer To avoid print quality problems the interior of the printer must be cleaned with every toner container replacement IMPORTANT Before cleaning the printer remove the paper on the MP tray 1 Open the top cover and front cover 2 Pullthe developer unit together with the toner container 3 Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the registration Registration roller metal roller metal 4 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container back into the machine 7 9 Maintenance 5 Close the front cover and top cover 6 Open the left cover Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the vents T Close the left cover 8 Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the vent on the right side of the machine 7 10 Maintenance Prolonged Non Use and Moving of the Printer Prolonged Non
163. e network authentication server Note These settings are only displayed when Netwk Authentic has been set as the Login Type Enabling of amp N User Login Administration on page 4 112 1 Inthe User Login menu press A or V to select Netwk Auth Set i 2 Press OK The Netwk Auth Set menu screen appears Netwk Auth Set 0m Server Type Host Name Port Exit The options available in Netwk Auth Set are as follows Server Type Server type selection 4 113 Host Name Entering of Host Name 4 113 Port Port number setting 4 113 Domain Name Selecting of Domain Name 4 114 4 112 Operation Panel Server Type Server type selection Select the type of server for the authentication server Server Type Dn NTLM Ext Host Name Entering of Host Name 1 2 Enter the host name for the authentication server x Host Name Ui x Domain pad OK 1 Domain 01 Domain 02 Port Port number setting Set the Port number for the authentication server Note This setting is only displayed when T 113 Port OK 90934 Ext Inthe Netwk Auth Set menu press A or V to select Server Type Press OK The Server Type screen appears The available server types are as follows NTLM Kerberos Ext Note Select Ext to perform ID Card Authentication Press A or V to select the
164. e optional wireless network interface kit Check the settings of the wireless network interface For details refer to Optional Network Optional Network settings on page 4 65 Account error Press OK This message is displayed when the Job Accounting function is enabled and an attempt to specify job accounting settings or to register or delete an account fails To return the printer to the print ready status press OK Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Add paper in casset i The paper has run out in the paper source displayed Supply paper according to the paper source displayed paper cassettes MP tray or optional paper feeders Add paper in MP tray Administrator only You can only change the settings selected when logged in as a user with administrator privileges Alternative E A4 Label E A3 Plain e A4 Plain When the cassette does not contain any paper that matches the print data paper size and type this message allows you to specify an alternative cassette to use instead A paper source number is only displayed when an optional paper feeder is installed To print from a different paper source refer to Auto Cass Change Auto Cassette Change setting on page 4 42 Box limit exceeded The box capacity is full Either delete files or change the capacity of the box For details refer to Custom Box operation Box cr
165. e or optional paper feeder 8 18 Troubleshooting Duplex Unit 2 Remove any partially fed paper Note Check to see if paper is loaded correctly If not reload SS the paper 3 Push the cassette back in securely The printer warms up and resumes printing Paper is jammed in the duplex section Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below 1 Pull out the cassette from the machine IMPORTANT When pulling out the cassette from the machine ensure that it is supported and does not fall out 2 Open the duplex front cover and remove any jammed paper 8 19 Troubleshooting 3 Close the duplex front cover 4 Insert the cassette into the slot in the printer The printer warms up and resumes printing Inside the Printer Paper is jammed inside the printer Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below 1 Open the top cover and front cover IMPORTANT Before clearing the jammed paper remove the paper on the MP tray 2 Pull the developer unit together with the toner container 8 20 Troubleshooting 3 Remove the paper from the printer If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers pull it shown in the figure Note If you cannot find a paper jam try checking in
166. e reduction ratio It is displayed with either the paper size or the reduction ratio Refer to the table below for the possible settings for the combination of Source Size and Target Size Reduction Ratio Source Size Target Size Reduction Ratio Cassette 100 98 Ledger 100 98 Legal 100 98 Letter 100 A4 98 Oficio II 100 Folio 100 8K 100 16K 100 A5 100 98 BS A4 100 AS 98 100 Letter B5 A5 98 B4 B4 B5 A4 98 A3 A3 A4 B4 98 3 Press A or V to change to the Source Size required 4 53 Operation Panel Reduced Print Ui Cassette gt Orientation Print orientation Press gt to select Target Size Reduction Ratio and move the position being entered Press A or V to change to the Target Size required Only the Target Size Reduction Ratio changes Press OK The Reduced Print is set and the Page Setting menu reappears You can select portrait upright or landscape sideways page orientation Portrait Orientation n Orientation Pag OK 01 Portrait Landscape LF Action Linefeed Landscape Orientation Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select Orientation Press OK The Orientation screen ap
167. e selected job Accepted 5 26 Document Box Deleting a Private Stored Job You can individually delete stored jobs by performing the following procedure Jobs saved using Private Print will be automatically deleted when you turn the power off or after printing but jobs saved using Stored Job will not be deleted automatically 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Private Stored 2 Press OK The Private Stored screen appears listing the user Private Stored Dn names for stored jobs amp User 02 amp User 03 3 Press A or V to select the user name you entered in the printer driver i 4 Press OK The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the EL 0 selected user name fj Data 01 w Data 02 wv Select 5 Press A or V to select the name of the job to be deleted When Select Right Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file Select the checkmarked file and press Select Right Select again to cancel the selection Note To select all files follow the steps of Select Deselect All Files on page 5 23 Delete a File Delete the file s selected in the Job Box 1 In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print a ee lt m Delete menu screen appears OIPrint 02 Delete 2 Press A or V to select Delete and press OK The IDis nes m displayed 3 Use the numeric
168. e the printer requires the operator s attention refer to Error Messages on page 8 5 4 2 Operation Panel Indicators in Message Display SENS OReady amp bData Attention Ready to print Ez A4 gj A4 Status Toner Ready Data and Attention Indicators The following indicators light during normal operation and whenever the printer needs attention Depending on the status of lighting each indicator has the following meaning Indicator Description Flashing Indicates an error that you can resolve For details refer to Troubleshooting on page 8 1 a Or the printer is in Auto Sleep The printer wakes from Auto Sleep whenever a print job is received The OReady printer then warms up and goes on line For details on Auto Sleep refer to Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time on page 4 91 On Indicates that the printer is ready and on line The printer prints the data it receives Off Indicates that the printer is off line because printing is manually stopped or automatically stopped due to an error condition Data can be received but will not be printed For details refer to Error Messages on page 8 5 if printing is automatically stopped when an error condition has occurred L Flashing Indicates either that data is being received or that the optional SSD or SD card is being accessed On Indicates that data received is being processed before printing
169. eation editing and deletion on page 5 4 Canceling Displayed when data is being canceled Cannot connect It was not possible to connect to the network with the optional wireless network interface kit Check the settings of the wireless network interface For details refer to Optional Network Optional Network settings on page 4 65 8 6 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Cannot connect to Authentication Server Check the domain name Press OK and check the following items Registration to Authentication Server Password and computer address for Authentication Server Connection of Network For details refer to Netwk Auth Set Netwk authentication setting on page 4 112 Cannot connect Multiple access points are enabled Multiple access points were detected with the optional wireless network interface kit Check the settings of the wireless network interface For details refer to Optional Network Optional Network settings on page 4 65 Cannot duplex print on this paper You attempted to print with a paper size and paper type that cannot be used for duplex printing Press OK to print onto one side of the paper only Cannot execute this job Restricted by Authorization settings This message is shown when operations are restricted in the account when job accounting is effective To change the account sett
170. ect Right Select again to cancel the selection Note To select all files follow the steps of Select Deselect SJ All Files on page 5 23 Print a File Print the file s selected in the Job Box 1 Inthe file list screen select the item and press OK The Print lt m Delete menu screen appears 01 Print 02 5Delete 2 Press or V toselect Print and press OK If the selected job was Hs m saved as a Private Print job its 1D is displayed If the job was saved in stored job mode the number of direct copies is displayed d 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the access code entered in the printer driver Press OK If the entered access code is correct the Copies menu Screen appears If the entered access code is incorrect the ID menu screen reappears Note When the access code is set to the document selected in the check box Incorrect IDis displayed for the disagreement 4 To print 2 or more copies use the numeric keys or press or V to ud aes l vm set the number of copies to be printed copies After selecting the multiple copies in the printer driver you can also restore to 1 from the operation panel using the same method Note is displayed first and it means it according to the set number of copies when the data of each file is preserved In this setting each set number of copies is printed 5 Press OK The message Accepted appears and the printer prints th
171. ect The Formatting screen appears and SSD formatting begins Once the formatting ends the standby Screen reappears Pressing No Right Select returns to the Device Common menu without formatting the SSD Format SD Card Formatting the SD card The printer is equipped with a slot for an SD card For details about the handling of the SD card refer to Installing and Formatting the SD SDHC Memory Card on page A 9 A SD card must be formatted before it can be used in the printer Formatting allows data to be written to the SD card Note Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SD card Formatting of the SD card must be executed from the printer When a new SD card is inserted in the printer s slot Format SD Card will appear on the message display 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Format SD Card 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Format Are you sure SD Card Yes No 3 Press Yes Left Select The Formatting SD card screen appears and SD card formatting begins Once the formatting ends the standby screen reappears Pressing No Right Select returns to the Device Common menu without formatting the SD card Display Bright Display brightness setting Sets the brightness of the message display 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Display Bright 4 84 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The Dis
172. ed documents can be printed directly from the machine this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don t want others to see Advanced This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data 2 Profiles Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile Saved profiles can be recalled at any time so it is a convenient practice to save frequently used settings 3 Reset Click to revert settings to their initial values Printing Printing on Non standard Sized Paper When cardstock or an envelope is loaded in the Multi Purpose Tray set the paper size and type and then register the paper size on the Basic tab of the print settings screen in the printer driver Once registered the paper size can be selected from the Page size menu 9 1 OOAN OO FW DN 10 Select MP Tray in the Source menu Display the print settings screen Click the Basic tab Click Page Sizes to register the size Click New Enter the name of the paper Enter the paper size Click Save Click OK In the Print size menu Select the page size name registered in steps 4 to 8 11 Select the type of paper in the Media type menu PCL XL cB voce Page Sizes Select page size Oficio II Hagaki Oufuku hagaki Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Stock form Custom 01
173. ed in a Custom Box Note The creation and setting of Custom Boxes is also possible from Command Center RX Procedure for printing using Custom Box Follow the work flow below when using Custom Box Registering the Custom Box page 5 4 v Specifying the Custom Box from a computer and sending the print job page 5 30 v Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it page 5 13 Operation panel display 1 Press Document Box Either the Custom Box list screen or the Job Box menu screen is displayed x Custom Box Ui Note After pressing Document Box it is possible to dis play either the Custom Box list screen or the Job Box menu JM aaa menu screen or to set them Refer to Def Screen Box Document Box default screen setting on page 4 77 If the Job Box menu screen is displayed follow the procedure below to display the Custom Box list screen 1 Press Back 2 Press A or V to select Custom Box 3 Press OK The Custom Box list screen appears The options available in Custom Box are as follows Custom Box operation Box creation editing and deletion 5 4 File operations Printing deleting and moving files 5 13 5 3 Document Box Custom Box operation Box creation editing and deletion It is possible to create Custom Boxes and change Box settings The following operations are possible Custom Box creation 5 4 Editing and Deleting Custom Boxes 5
174. ee ee ee ee Rees 7 11 MP Multi Purpose Tray 00 1 2 Clearing paperjams llle 8 18 Il ading paper 2 2 zu ire ea ee xen Ens 2 32 Media ype cs Lb hace ia a ae re 4 31 Paper feed source 0 00 cece eee eee 4 41 Paper SIZE xe hehe dana ener ims 4 30 MP Tray Priority liliis 4 42 N NetBEUIL 122 xen Rp ep a Glossary 2 Network Interface Connector 1 4 Network Interface Kit llli A 11 Network Settings 0 00 e eee ee eee 2 2 4 57 AUtO IB 5i eek a oe ohio ehh etme 4 58 BOn jOU sso ius Erebi Ue etes leo ee ales 4 60 Default gateway lesen 4 60 DACP 3 acest esten ee cotes at rie dan ed Ima 4 58 DHCPv6 damsa ce es 4 62 FTP Sever i oe bee age bo eae 4 63 BRE PT DET 4 63 IP Address ocliz e eR ue e ug SES 4 59 IPv4 setting llli 4 58 IPv6 setting cers hilllil dle bi Ex L5exde 4 61 LDAP seo cence Da eed eM ERG RU es Soke eos 4 63 PD nes bho e ogee betbe blades bag hb SER 4 63 NetBEUI e esed ER RR i E eee a 4 63 POP3 E mail RX sese 4 63 Protocol detail llli 4 63 RA Stateless llillllsllllellnn 4 62 RAW POr 2 m Gan dive wie rb s Rina RAUS 9 9 s 4 63 SMTP E mail TX 00 000 ee 4 63 SNMP ete ci winch a Re S enue meee 4 63 SNMPv3 0 te ne 4 63 Subnet mask cece eee eee 4 59 FORHP 2 TREE Nts 4 57 TORAP PVG isiu tka dogs er Se ag ard Bede
175. eeder cassettes 1 Pull the cassette out of the printer and set the paper size using the paper size dial Paper Size Dial 2 Adjust the paper guides in the cassette to the size of the paper to be used for printing and load the paper into the cassette Media Type Setting the cassette paper type By setting a paper type plain recycled etc for the paper cassette you can automatically select the paper in the paper cassette according to the paper type you command on the printer driver The default setting is plain paper for all paper cassettes If the PF 4100 optional paper feeder is installed use the same procedure to setting the cassette paper type For more information about paper types that you can feed from the paper cassette refer to Paper Specifications on page A 16 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select the cassette you want to set 2 Press OK The Cassette Set menu screen appears Cassette 1 Set m shows the number of the cassette installed in the printer 1 to 5 Other Paper Size Exit 3 Press A or V to select Media Type 4 Press OK The Media Type screen appears listing the media types Media Type lt i that can be used with the selected cassette Preprinted The available Media Types are as follows Bond Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched High Quality CUSTOM 1 to 8 5 Press A or V to select the
176. een appears Summer Time Dn 01 Off On 3 Press A or V to select whether the summer time is enabled 4 Press OK The summer time is set and the Date Setting menu reappears Buzzer Alarm Buzzer setting This function uses tones to notify the user of printer operations and the printer status This setting is useful for example when the printer is located some distance from the user The options available in Buzzer are as follows Key Confirmation Key confirmation tone setting 4 81 Job Finish Job completed tone setting 4 81 Ready Preparation completed tone setting 4 81 Error Error tone setting 4 82 Keyboard Confirm Keyboard confirmation tone setting 4 82 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Buzzer 4 80 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The Buzzer screen appears x Buzzer pad Ok Key Confirmation Job Finish Ready Exit Key Confirmation Key confirmation tone setting When On is selected in this setting a tone sounds each time a key is used The default setting is On 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Key Confirmation 2 Press OK The Key Confirmation screen appears Key Confirmation Mm Off 3 Press or V to select whether the key confirmation tone is enabled 4 Press OK The key confirmation tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears Job Finish Job completed tone setting When O
177. elect IPv6 Setting 2 Press OK The IPv6 Setting menu screen appears IPv6 Setting OK TCP IP IPv6 Exit The options available in the TCP IP IPv6 settings are as follows TCP IP IPv6 Enable disable TCP IP IPv6 4 62 RA Stateless RA Stateless setting 4 62 DHCPv6 DHCPV6 setting 4 62 IMPORTANT The RA Stateless and DHCPv6 menu options for TCP IP IPv6 are displayed when TCP IP IPv6 is enabled Operation Panel TCP IP IPv6 Enable disable TCP IP IPv6 This specified whether TCP IP IPv6 is used 1 Inthe rPv6 Setting menu press A or V to select TCP IP IPv6 2 Press OK The TCP IP IPv6 screen appears TCP IP IPv6 Dn On 3 Press A or V to select whether TCP IP IPv6 is enabled 4 Press OK The TCP IP IPv6 setting is set and the IPv6 Setting menu reappears RA Stateless RA Stateless setting The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is an IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification 1 Inthe rPv6 Setting menu press A or V to select RA Stateless 2 Press OK The RA Stateless screen appears RA Stateless lt 0 Off 3 Press or V to select wheth
178. elect On in this setting to enlarge or reduce XPS files to fit the printable area during printing In the Copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears Press A or V to select XPS FitTo Page Press OK The XPS FitTo Page screen appears Press A or V to select whether XPS FitTo Page mode is enabled Press OK The XPS FitTo Page setting is set and the Function menu reappears Detail Shows the details of the selected file Use this to view detailed information on the files and folders in the USB memory Use the procedure described in Print File Printing and checking the files in the USB memory on page 4 21 to display a list of the files or folders you want to check Press A or V to select the folder or file you want to check Press Detail Right Select The Detail screen appears If you selected a file there are 4 Detail screens Press lt or gt to move between the screens If you selected a folder there are 2 Detail screens Press lt or gt to move between the screens Pressing OK while file or folder details are displayed returns you to the Print File menu If the entire name shown as the File Name or Folder Name will not fit on one line pressing Detail Right Select changes toa 3 line name display If the name is 3 or more lines long you can scroll up or down by pressing A or V 4 27 Operation Panel Detail B Ok ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
179. en appears USB Device m 01 Unblock Block 3 Press or V to select whether to block and protect the USB device 4 Press OK The USB Device setting is setand the 1 F Block Set menu reappears Option I F Optional network interface setting This blocks and protects the optional network interface The default setting is Unblock 1 Inther r Block Set menu press A or V to select Option I F 2 Press OK The Option I F screen appears Option I F OK 01 Unblock Block 3 Press or V to select whether to block and protect the optional network interface 4 Press OK The Optional I F setting is set and the I F Block Set menu reappears 4 105 Operation Panel Parallel I F Parallel interface setting This blocks and protects the parallel interface The default setting is Unblock Parallel I F Pad OK 01 Unblock Block USB Storage USB memory setting 1 2 Inthe I F Block Set menu press A or V to select Parallel I F Press OK The Parallel I F screen appears Press A or V to select whether to block and protect the optional parallel interface Press OK The Parallel I F setting is set and the I F Block Set menu reappears This blocks and protects the USB storage USB memory The default setting is Unblock USB Storage U 01 Unblock Block Security Level 1 2 In the I F Block Set menu press A or V to select USB Storage
180. ent character type ABC Text 123 Text Symbols n WB 0 60 0 E fuat t accetta iS O 2 G t q 1 Text J Entering Characters After selecting a character type use the procedure below to enter characters Entering Alphabets and Numerals Types Description ABC To enter alphabets 123 To enter numerals Symbols To enter symbols In a character entry screen press Text Right Select to select the type of characters you want to enter Each time you press Text Right Select the character type switches as follows ABC 123 Symbols ABC Referring to the table below press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed Key Entry mode Available characters 1 e Alphabetic Symbol Q 1 LJ Numeric 1 2 ABC Alphabetic Symbol abcABC2 LJ Numeric 2 3 DEF Alphabetic Symbol defDEF3 U J Numeric 3 4 GHI Alphabetic Symbol ghi GHI4 Ld Numeric 4 A 3 Appendix Key Entry mode Available characters D JKL Alphabetic Symbol JkKIJKLS Numeric 5 6 mno Alphabetic Symbol mnoMNO6 Numeric 6 7 Pans Alphabetic Symbol pqrsPQRS7 Numeric 7 8 Tuv Alphabetic Symbol tuvTUV8 Z Numeric 8 9 wxvz Alphabetic Symbol WXyzWXYZ9 LSJ Numeric 9 as Alphabetic Symbol
181. er 2008 32bit 64bit NetWare 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x MacOS 9 x Mac OS X PowerPC Ver 10 3 x Ver 10 5 5 Intel Ver 10 4 4 Ver 10 7 x UNIX Appendix Item Description Network protocols IPv6 Apple Bonjour Compatible DHCPv6 DNSv6 FTP FTPS HTTP HTTPS IPPS ICMPv6 IKEv1 IPP IPPS Kerberos LDAP LPD POP3 RawPort SLP SMTP SNMP SNMPv1 v2c v3 SNTP ThinPrint IPv4 Apple Bonjour Compatible BOOTP DHCP DNS FTP FTPS HTTP HTTPS ICMP IPP IPPS KCP Kerberos LDAP LPD NetBIOS over TCP IP POP3 POP3 over SSL RawPort SLP SMTP SNMP SNMPv1 v2c v3 SNTP ThinPrint WINS Other AppleTalk IPX SPX LLTD NetBEUI NetWare NDS Bindery Security protocols EAP TLS EAP TTLS EAP FAST IKE PEAP SNMPv3 SSL TLS HTTPS Operating conditions 0 to 60 C 20 to 80 RH no condensation Storage conditions 20 to 50 C 20 to 90 RH no condensation EMI conformity FCC Class B USA CE EU VCCI Class B Japan Parallel Interface Kit IB 32 Option Item Description Installation Environment Conforms to the machine s installation environment Interface Parallel Interface x 1 IEEE 1284 compliant Power supply From the machine Environmental Specifications Item Description Time to Sleep mode default setting 1 minute Recovery time from Sleep mode 18 seconds or less Duplexing Standard Paper supply capability 100
182. er RA Stateless is enabled 4 Press OK The RA Stateless setting is set and the IPv6 Setting menu reappears DHCPv6 DHCPV6 setting DHCPv6 is the next generation of the Internet s Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6 It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the network DHCPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation 1 Inthe rPv6 Setting menu press A or V to select DHCPv6 2 Press OK The DHCPv6 screen appears DHCPv6 Ok Off 3 Press A or V to select whether DHCPv6 is enabled 4 Press OK The DHCPv6 setting is set and the 1Pv6 Setting menu reappears 4 62 Operation Panel Protocol Detail Detailed settings for the network protocol This selects the settings for Protocol Detail Item Description Default Setting Restarting the System NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive On x documents using NetBEUI SNMPv3 Set SNMPv3 Off e FTP Server Select whether or not to receive On e documents using FTP SNMP Select whether or not to On e communicate using SNMP SMTP E mail TX Select w
183. er User Guide for the driver settings 5 22 Document Box The following operations are possible Printing Additional Copies using Quick Copy Remaining Copies of a Proof and Hold Job 5 23 Select Deselect All Files 5 23 Print a File 5 24 Deleting a Quick Copy Proof and Hold Job 5 24 Delete a File 5 25 Printing Additional Copies using Quick Copy Remaining Copies of a Proof and Hold Job Quick Copy Ok amp User 02 amp User 03 amp User 01 Ui Data 01 ut Data 02 End Select Select Deselect All Files All files in the Job Box are selected amp User 01 Sard OK faData 01 Ed Data 02 ut Select amp User 01 m Data 01 Hn Data 02 oO Select amp User 01 Uni Data 01 Data 02 Select wv i4 1 2 In the Job Box menu press A or V to select Quick Copy Press OK The Quick Copy screen appears listing the user names for stored jobs Press A or V to select the user name you entered in the printer driver Press OK The printer displays a list of the jobs stored under the selected user name Press A or V to scroll to the desired job title When Select Right Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file Select the checkmarked file and press Select Right Select again to cancel the selection Note To select all files follow the steps
184. er the texts in the text box Preparation before Use Command Center RX If the machine is connected to the network you can configure various settings using Command Center RX This section explains how to access Command Center RX and how to change security settings and the host name For details on Command Center RX refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Note To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages enter the User Name and Password and click amp Login Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages including Document Box and Settings on the navigation menu The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished case sensitive Settings that the administrator and general users can configure or check in Command Center RX are as follows Setting Description eeki fea rator User Device Information The machine s structure can be checked O O Job Status Displays all device information including print jobs and job log history O O Document Box Add or delete document boxes or delete documents within a O ot document box Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine O Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings Q Network Settings Configure the network advanced setting
185. erver login information using an ID card registered The Authentication server KYOCERA Net Manager Optional Software must be installed ID card and ID card reader they are used to register and authenticate a user The Spooler server it sends the print job to a selected printer after the user logs in For more details contact your dealer or service representative Printing by AirPrint AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4 2 and later products and Mac OS X 10 7 and later products This function enables you to connect and print to any AirPrint compatible device without installing a printer driver To allow the machine to be found when printing by AirPrint you can set machine location information in Command Center RX For details refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Printing by Google Cloud Print Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google and does not require a printer driver This service enables a user with a Google account to print from a machine connected to the Internet The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX Refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Note A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print Obtain a Google account if you do not have one It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance The machine can be registered from a PC connected to the same network 3 7 Printing
186. es Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Labels Yes No No Heavy 1 No Bond Yes Yes Yes Normal 3 Yes Recycled Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Vellum Yes No No Light No Rough Yes Yes Yes Normal 3 Yes Letterhead Yes Yes Yes Normal 3 Yes Color Yes Yes Yes Normal 3 Yes Prepunched Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Envelope Yes No No Heavy 3 No Cardstock Yes No No Heavy 3 No Thick Yes No No Heavy 3 No High Quality Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes Custom 1 to 8f Yes Yes Yes Normal 2 Yes T Thisisa paper type defined and registered by the user Up to eight types of user settings may be defined For details refer to Media Type Set Paper type settings on page 4 37 A 25 Appendix Specifications Note Specifications are subject to change without notice Machine Item Description Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor single drum system Paper Weight Cassette MP Tray 60 to 120 g m 60 to 220 g m 230 g m Cardstock Paper Types Cassette Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched High Quality and CUSTOM 1 to 8 MP Tray Plain Preprinted Labels Bond Recycled Vellum Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched Envelope Cardstock Thick High Quality and CUSTOM 1 to 8 Paper Sizes Cassette A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A5 A6 R B4 B5 R B5 B6 R Folio 216 x 340 mm Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio II ISO B5 8K 16K and Custom
187. es into the printer one sheet at a time from the MP tray Always load the transparencies horizontally If the transparencies have rough edges on the back it may cause a paper jam Remove the rough edges reverse the sides feed the sheet from the opposite edge or flip the sheet over When unloading transparencies e g for clearing jams hold them carefully by the edges to avoid leaving fingerprints on them A 21 Appendix Labels Labels must be fed from the MP tray The basic rule for printing on adhesive labels is that the adhesive must never come into contact with any part of the machine Adhesive paper sticking to the drum or rollers will damage the machine Label paper has a structure comprising of three layers as shown in the diagram The top sheet is printed on The adhesive layer consists of pressure sensitive adhesives The carrier sheet also called the linear or Top sheet white packing sheet holds the labels until used Due to the complexity of its bond paper composition adhesive backed label paper is particularly likely to give Adhesive printing problems Carrier sheet Adhesive label paper must be entirely covered by its top sheet with no spaces between the individual labels Labels with spaces in between are liable to peel off causing serious paper jam problems Some label paper is manufactured with an extra margin of top sheet around the edge Do not remove the extra top sheet from th
188. esented with numerical expressions You can specify the font size in steps of 0 25 points up to 999 75 points POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color Glossary 2 Glossary printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM Prints Per Minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the Product Library disk enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine RA Stateless The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is an IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Spe
189. etwork interface setting Off USB Cable USB interface setting Off USB Host USB memory slot setting Off RAM Disk RAM Disk Mode setting Off NIC Option Network Interface Kit NIC setting Off Parallel I F Parallel interface setting Off T Ifthe Power Off Rule is previously set to On the machine turns off the power and all the data stored in the RAM Disk is deleted Note When On is set it automatically turns off NIC is only displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit IB 50 or Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 has been installed Parallel I F is only displayed when the optional Parallel Interface Kit IB 32 has been installed Operation Panel 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Power Off Rule 2 Press OK The Power Off Rule menu screen appears Power Off Rule i Network USB Cable USB Host Exit 3 Press A or V to select the condition to be set 4 Press OK The screen for the condition selected is displayed Network m 01kOff On 5 Press A or V to select whether or not to have the power switch off 6 Press OK Set to switch the power off and the Power Off Rule menu reappears Note Repeat steps 3 to 6 to set for a different condition Power Off Timer Power off timer settings The time until the power turns off can be set The default setting is 1 hour 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Power Off Time
190. eyboard qi Available Network It is possible to check the status of the network for the machine 1 Inthe Status menu press A or V to select Network 2 Press OK The status of the network is displayed Network OK Status Connected Option Network When the optional Network Interface Kit is installed it is possible to check the status of the option network Note Option Network is only displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed 1 Inthe status menu press A or V to select Option Network 2 Press OK The status of the option network is displayed Option Network OK Status Connected Status Menu Wireless Network When the optional wireless network interface kit is installed it is possible to check the status of the wireless network Note Wireless Network is only displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed 1 Inthe status menu press A or V to select Wireless network 2 Press OK The status of the wireless network is displayed Wireless Network mMm Status 1 2 Connected 3 Press lor gt The NetwkName SSID is displayed Wireless Network mMm NetwkName SSID 2 2 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail If the entire name shown as the NetwkName SSID will not fit on one Detail 0 line pressing Detail Right Select changes to a 3 line name ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU display VWXYZa
191. field selected press OK The Login User Name entry screen is displayed x Login User Name m ABC Text 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User SV Name is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 6 Press or V to select the Login Password entry field Login User Name OK 4000 Login Password Login 4 133 Operation Panel Login Password Login User Name B OK 4000 Login Password a Op Functions Pat OK ID Card UG 33 DATA SECURITY License On Detail n License On BS OK Official em License Key 0000 9999 0000 10 H 12 13 14 15 16 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login SV Password is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the Op Functions menu appears Press A or V to select the desired application Press OK Press A or V to select License On
192. files on an SD card 4 15 1 Inthe Report menu press A or V to select Report Print z 2 Press OK The Report Print menu appears showing a list of the Report Print D types of report that can be printed Note that report types shown may vary depending on which optional units are installed in the printer Status Page Font List Exit Menu Map Printing a menu map The printer prints a full list of the menu selection system menu map 1 Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select Menu Map 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted appears and Print the printer prints the menu map Are you sure Menu Map Yes No Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu without printing the menu map 4 10 Operation Panel A Note It is possible to use the numeric keys to enter the Menu SV number and display the settings required e g Displaying the Menu Map printing menu 1 Press Menu 2 Press 1 on the Numeric Keys The Report menu appears 3 Press 1 on the Numeric Keys The Report Print menu appears 4 Press 1 on the Numeric Keys A confirmation message is displayed Menu Map Sample Menu Map CR KYOCERA Printer PTT TTT LY
193. follows 02 RAM Disk Mode is set to Of f Set the setting to On Refer to RAM Disk Mode Setting the RAM disk on page 4 83 03 The RAM disk is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command 04 No disk space Purge unnecessary files or increase the RAM disk size For more information refer to RAM Disk Size RAM disk size setting on page 4 83 05 The desired file does not exist in the RAM disk Stored the file in the RAM disk 10 The file stored in the RAM disk is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command Registered numbers exceeded Cannot add There are already 100 accounts registered so it is not possible to register any new accounts Replace MK Replace Maintenance Kit which is displayed on the message display Replacement of the maintenance kit is necessary at every 500 000 images of printing and requires professional servicing Replace toner Toner has run out in the toner container Replace the toner container using a new toner kit The printer does not operate when this message is displayed Restricted by Job Accounting Press OK This message is displayed when printing was attempted despite the Job Account function being on with Restriction applied as the job limit for each job account To return the printer to the print ready status press OK For more information refer to J
194. fter Print nl 03 off On 4 Press A or V to select the Del after Print setting 5 Press OK The Del after Print setting is set and the Function menu reappears Delete a File Delete the file s selected in the Custom Box 1 Inthe file list screen select the item and press OK The Print Delete menu screen appears 30001 Box 01 Sard OK Print ChangeSet Delete 2 Press A or V to select Delete 3 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Delete Are you sure i Document 201408 Yes No 4 Press Yes Left Select The message Completed appears and the selected file s are deleted Completed Pressing No Right Select returns to the file list menu screen without deleting the file Moving files A file can be moved to a different Custom Box 1 In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print 30001 Box 01 m PEENE Delete menu screen appears r n Print ChangeSet Delete 2 Press A or V to select Move 30001 Box 01 mm Move A 3 Press OK The Custom Box list screen appears Custom Box Bag OK 50002 Box 02 0003 Box 03 20004 Box 04 Document Box 4 Press or V to select the destination Box Completed 5 Press OK The message Completed appears and the selected file s is are moved Note If the screen for entering a password is displayed then enter the pas
195. gs and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Custom Box The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer s operation panel DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System A Dynamic Domain Name System DDNS is a system for providing a fixed host name for IP addresses which change dynamically By updating the correspondence between the host name registered and the IP address as the IP address changes it is possible to connect with the same host name even when the IP address has changed Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router which serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned
196. hange the detailed settings of the wireless network 1 Inthe Wireless Network menu press A or V to select Custom Setup 4 68 Operation Panel Custom Setup Channel Connect m Netwk Name SSID Connection Mode Exit Press OK The Custom Setup menu screen appears The following operations are possible Netwk Name SSID Registration of the access point s SSID Connection Mode Switch between connection modes Channel Channel settings Netwk Authentic Network Authentication setting Encryption Encryption settings Netwk Name SSID Registration of the access point s SSID This sets the SSID Service Set Identifier for the wireless network access point the machine will be connected to 4 Netwk Name SSID A lt gt v ABC Text 1 2 4 In the Custom Setup menu press A or V to select Netwk Name SSID Press OK The Netwk Name SSID entry screen appears Enter the access point s SSID using the numeric keys Note Up to 32 characters can be entered For details on SV entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press OK The Custom Setup menu reappears Connection Mode Switch between connection modes This selects the method for connecting to the wireless network Set Ad Hoc when machines will be connected directly with each other without going through an access point Ad Hoc
197. hether or not to send e Off x mail using SMTP POP3 E mail RX Select whether or not to receive e Off x mail using POP3 RAW Port Select whether or not to On e communicate using RAW Port LPD Select whether or not to receive On e documents using LPD as the network protocol HTTP Select whether or not to On e communicate using HTTP LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP off x T The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed x The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed Use the procedure below 1 Inthe TCP IP Settings menu press A or V to select Protocol Detail NetBEUI SNMPv3 Protocol Detail Mm FTP Server Exit 2 Press OK The Protocol Detail menu screen appears 3 Press A or V to select the item for which you want to make settings NetBEUI Off TE step 3 5 Press A or V to select On or off 4 Press OK This displays the setting screen for the item selected in The screen shown is the one when NetBEUI is selected 6 Press OK The Protocol Detail menu reappears 4 63 Operation Panel Restart Network Restarting the network card After all network related settings have been done restart the network card of the device This is mandatory to make the settings effective Network m TCP IP Settings Restart Network Exit Restart Are you sure Yes No
198. hine s features KX XPS DRIVER Printer driver for the XPS XML Paper Specification format developed by Microsoft Corporation PCL mini driver A Microsoft Mini Driver type driver which emulates and outputs both PCL and KPDL mini dri KPDL KPDL is Kyocera s implementation of the PostScript language With mini driver this driver it is only possible to use a limited number of all the functions of the m machine and the optional functions there are KYOCERA Net Viewer Utility that enables the machine when connected to a network to be monitored Status Monitor Utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting Q function KYOCERA Net Direct Simple printing of PDF documents Print FONTS These are the screen fonts equivalent to the printer fonts Q Installing Printer Driver in Windows Express Install The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using Express Install Note In Windows operating systems you must be logged on with administrator rights to install the printer driver For details refer to Custom Installation in the Custom Install on page 2 9 1 Insert the Product Library disk Note Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged SS on with administrator privileges If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel If the autorun screen is displayed click Run setup exe If the user accou
199. hts are as follows Extra Heavy Heavy 3 Heavy 2 Heavy 1 Normal 3 Normal 2 Normal 1 Light Each media type s default weight is indicated Media Type Paper Weight Media Type Paper Weight Plain Normal 2 Letterhead Normal 3 Transparency Extra Heavy Color Normal 3 Preprinted Normal 2 Prepunched Normal 2 Labels Heavy 1 Envelope Heavy 3 Bond Normal 3 Cardstock Heavy 3 Recycled Normal 2 Thick Heavy 3 Vellum Light HighQuality Normal 2 Rough Normal 3 CUSTOM 1 to 8 Normal 2 Note Depending on the type of paper the toner may not adhere to the paper properly To solve this problem select amp the half speed mode from the printer driver For more information refer to Half Speed Mode Printer Driver Settings on page 3 6 Use the procedure below to set the paper weight For the procedure for setting weights for custom paper CUSTOM 1 to 8 refer to Custom Paper Settings on page 4 38 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V toselect Media Type Set Operation Panel Plain Preprinted Media Type Set Transparency m Exit Plain A lt gt Y Paper Weight Paper Weight Heavy 1 Normal 3 z Md OK p 06 Normal 2 Exit Custom Paper Settings Press OK The Media Type Set screen appears listing the media types that can used with the printer Press A or V to select the media type for which you wan
200. hysician f you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth out with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician f you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner S Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825 1 2007 CAUTIO
201. ic keys or press A or V to set the default gateway You can set any value between 000 and 255 The method for entering is the same as for the IP Address 26 Press OK The default gateway is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears This completes the network settings Press Menu and end the mode selection menu Z Note When the network settings have been changed restart amp the network card of the device This is mandatory to make the settings effective For details refer to Restart Network Restarting the network card on page 4 64 Printing a Status Page After completing the network settings print a status page The status page allows you to confirm a range of information including network addresses and network protocols To print a status page select Report Print from the Report menu and then select Status Page Refer to Report Print on page 4 10 for detailed information 2 6 Preparation before Use Installing Software Ensure the printer is plugged in and connected to the PC before installing the printer driver and utilities from the Product Library disk Software The following software can be installed from the provided Product Library disk In Express Install the KX Driver Status Monitor and Fonts are installed automatically Software Description Pes Install KX DRIVER Driver for printing files on a computer with the machine This printer driver Q enables full use of the mac
202. if you want to continue printing even if the paper size or type you specified is different from the fixed paper source or select Display Error to have the paper feed error displayed 1 Inthe Error Handling menu press A or V to select Paper Mismatch z 2 Press OK The Paper Mismatch screen appears Paper Mismatch Ui 01 Continue Display Error 3 Press A or V to select the setting for handling paper mismatch errors 4 Press OK The handling of paper mismatch errors is set and the Error Handling menu screen reappears MP Tray Empty Warning when the MP tray is empty Turn this setting to On if you want the error displayed when the MP tray is configured as the default paper source and there is no paper in the MP tray or turn it to O not to have the error displayed The setting on enables the paper empty message to display when the MP tray is empty 1 Inthe Error Handling menu press A or V to select MP Tray Empty 2 Press OK The MP Tray Empty screen appears MP Tray Empty mn Off 4 86 Operation Panel 3 Press A or V to select the setting for the paper empty message to display 4 Press OK The display of MP Tray Empty is set and the Error Handling menu screen reappears Timer Setting This specifies timer related settings such as the automatic form feed timeout and the timeout settings for Auto Sleep IMPORTANT To change the Timer Setting the ad
203. ight notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUEN
204. ii Error Handling c eere mee RA lee ios 4 85 Duplex paper error llle 4 86 MP tray empty i duerme gern xr pae 4 86 Paper mismatch 2 uei scd RETE x Ete 4 86 Error Messages 20 0c cece eee llle 8 5 Expansion Memory Module Option sui oho adeen bv baie othe paths ER EPS A 5 F Faceup Output Tray 0 eee eee A 14 gu Ac 4 47 Front Cover 002 000 eee sese 1 3 FUSE COVGI su sau ka eue kei ue kd epe ER Rods 1 4 I ID Card Setting 0 2 cee ee eee 4 119 Indicator Attention 2 colle ee eee eee 1 5 4 3 Data cse p Me RG ane chan eee eee eee 1 5 4 3 Ready noscere eee kee eed 1 5 4 3 Inside the Printer Clearing paperjams sells 8 20 Installing Software slelleeeeene 2 7 Installing the Printer Driver Macintosh 00 00 000 eee eee eens 2 11 WINDOWS xscereaderseeder ky ee de eed 2 7 Interface Cover 000 00 cee eee 1 4 J Job Account Setting 00 4 121 JOD BOX epee aan ede a ee a hon oe a Rae Seed 5 21 INDE 5 28 JOD Log History ieee eee ke ik ain 4 16 Auto sending 0 ccc eee eee ee ee 4 16 Index 1 Destination llssllesleellees 4 18 Personal information 202 0055 4 20 Send history 2l llco m Rack ra Rede 4 17 Subj Gt 23 ere Lia ardt ettet gs 4 19 Job Name ssssslse eee 4 56 Job Retention 0 0 00000 cece eee 5 21 Printer driver
205. ilable in the TCP IP IPv4 settings are as follows DHCP DHCP setting 4 58 Auto IP Auto IP setting 4 58 P Address IP address setting 4 59 Subnet Mask Subnet mask setting 4 59 Default Gateway Gateway setting 4 60 Bonjour Bonjour setting 4 60 IMPORTANT The DHCP Auto IP IP address subnet mask default gateway and Bonjour menu options for IPv4 settings are displayed when TCP IP is enabled DHCP DHCP setting DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is the protocol that assigns the information required to establish a network connection when a host attempts to connect to the network Internet This information includes the IP address of the local node and the default router the router in the host s own network system and the DNS Domain Name System server DHCP is an extension of the BOOTP Bootstrap startup protocol 1 Inthe IPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select DHCP i 2 Press OK The DHCP screen appears DHCP mn Off 3 Press or V to select whether DHCP is enabled 4 Press OK The DHCP setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears Auto IP Auto IP setting This protocol is used for automatic assignment of an IP address when you connect to a small network that does not have a DHCP server Select an address from the range 169 254 0 1 to 169 254 255 254 and if no other device on the network is using that address it is used as your address 1 Inthe IPv4 Se
206. ing eee 4 110 Adjust Maint Adjust Maintenance selection setting cessere 4 130 Op Functions Optional application settings eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenne eene nnn nnn nnn nnn nant annman nnna 4 133 5 Document Box Document BOX eee ro CH MU REE UM M E MM M M ee nee 5 2 Custonn BOX oue e s comin a Ue Ee Ea I M D ME 5 3 JOD BOX zai tel uus en dc M uil e pM a IL LP 5 21 Computer Settings Printer Driver cene te reete tete ienai aSa ERI AS EA eee ease aa eene DeL isani 5 30 6 Status Menu Displaying the Status Menu Screen sissano ainada ada baia iaasa aiaa 6 2 JOD Status xcii aii akiai ara aai a E lie aiia 6 3 Job LOG e 6 4 USB Keyboard em 6 5 NQIWOEK e 6 5 ei Jc 6 5 Wireless rus e 6 6 Maintenance Toner Container Replacement eee p CIE RE QE EE MEE Li 7 2 Replacing the Waste Toner BOX cccccesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesnneeeeeensnneeeeeenssnaeeeeenseeeeeeseesneeeeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeneoees 7 7 Gleaning the PINON e 7 9 Prolonged Non Use and Moving of the Printer s cccesceeseeeeeeeeeeesneeeeneeeeeseaesenseeeeseeeesneeeenseeeesseaeeenenes 7 11 Troubleshooting erc 8 2 Print Quality Problems
207. ing AccountingAccess Account Local Exit Job Accounting Enabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting Use the procedure below 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Job Accounting i 2 Press OK The Job Accounting screen appears Job Accounting Ui 01 Off On 3 Press A or V to select On or off and then press OK The Job Account Set menu reappears AccountingAccess Setting the job accounting access Set the job accounting access 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select AccountingAccess 2 Press OK The AccountingAccess screen appears AccountingAccess Uni Network 3 Press or V to select Local or Network and press OK The Job Account Set menu reappears Note To select Network network authentication must be enabled and the server type must be set For details refer to Netwk Auth Set Netwk authentication setting on page 4 112 4 122 Operation Panel Account Local Job Accounting settings You can add change and delete an account set the restriction for each account and count the number of pages printed The options available in the Account Local menu are as follows Account Report Account report printing 4 123 Each Job Account Totals display by account 4 123 Account List Account List operation 4 124 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Account Local z 2
208. ings refer to Detail Edit Checking editing registered account ID settings on page 4 125 Cannot perform It is not possible to perform sanitization because a job is being processed etc Cannot remove the memory while in use This message is displayed when Remove Memory was selected while a USB memory was being used The previous screen is displayed again 1 or 2 seconds Cassette not loaded The corresponding paper cassette is not installed Install the cassette The cassette number can be 1 topmost to 5 bottom Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action This message is displayed when a paper lift error has occurred in the paper Check cassette 4 source s cassette Pull out the cassette for the paper source displayed either the paper cassettes or optional paper feeders and check if the paper is loaded correctly The message Call service is displayed when this error occurs repeatedly The left cover of the printer is open Close the left cover Close left cover The rear cover of the printer is open Close the rear cover Close rear cover The top cover of the printer is open Close the printer top cover Close top cover The IPv6 address entered in the host name is not enclosed in brackets To Enclose enter the IPv6 address enclose the address in brackets the IPv6 address in e g
209. ings for the cassettes 4 32 Media Type Set Paper type settings 4 37 Reset Type Adj Resets customized settings 4 40 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select Paper Settings 3 Press OK The Paper Settings menu appears showing a list of Paper Settings DI available options Cassette 1 Set Media Type Set Exit MP Tray Set MP tray settings To print correctly on paper supplied from the MP tray use the procedure below to set the paper size and media type Note Feeding the paper having a paper size which does not match the current paper size from the MP tray can cause paper jam The options available in MP Tray Set menu are as follows Paper Size Paper size setting for the MP tray 4 30 e Media Type Paper type setting for the MP tray 4 31 Paper Size Paper size setting for the MP tray You can use this to set the paper size that can be supplied from the MP tray The default setting is A4 For more information about the paper sizes that you can feed from the MP tray refer to Minimum and Maximum Paper Sizes on page A 17 1 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V to select MP Tray Set 2 Press OK The MP Tray Set menu screen appears MP Tray Set m Paper Size Media Type Exit 3 Press A or V to select Paper Size 4 30 Operation Panel Paper Size Ok A5 R L2 A6 Media Type Paper type setting for the MP tr
210. inimum Paper Size Minimum Paper Size 148 mm 5 83 inches 148 mm 5 83 inches eM 1 o 105 mm 2 70 mm 5 4 13 inches 5 2 76 inches E S E S Eo EN NO ot e or ON tor toc Maximum Maximum Paper Size Paper Size 297 mm 297 mm 11 69 inches 11 69 inches Note On the optional paper feeder PF 4100 the minimum size is 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 inches and the maximum size is 297 x 432 mm 11 69 x 17 00 inches Recommended Paper The following products are recommended for use with the printer for optimum performance Size Product Weight Letter Legal International Paper Hammermill Tidal MP 75 g m 20 Ib A4 Nautilus ReFresh TRIOTEC 80 g m A 17 Appendix Selecting the Right Paper This section describes the guidelines for selecting paper Condition Avoid using paper that is bent at the edges curled dirty torn embossed or contaminated with lint clay or paper shreds Use of paper in these conditions can lead to illegible printing and paper jams and can shorten the life of the machine In particular avoid using paper with a surface coating or other surface treatment Paper should have as smooth and even a surface as possible Composition Do not use paper that has been coated or surface treated and contains plastic or carbon The heat of fusing can cause such paper to give off harmful fumes Bond paper should contain at least 80 pulp Not more than 20 of the total paper content should con
211. int SSL settings can also be selected The default setting is On Note Thin Print is only displayed when the optional UG 33 has been activated 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select ThinPrint 2 Press OK The ThinPrint menu screen appears ThinPrint lt 0 Off On ThinPrintOverSSL Exit 3 Press or V to select Of f On 4 103 Operation Panel 4 Press OK The o On screen appears Off On m 01 off 5 Press A or V to select whether Thin Print is enabled m 6 Press OK The Thin Print is set and the ThinPrint menu ThinPrint m hd reappears Off On RP EN ThinPrintOverSSL When Thin Print is set to On the settings for Thin Print over SSL are displayed so continue on and set these Exit 7 Press A or V to select ThinPrintOverSSL 8 Press OK The ThinPrintOverSSL screen appears ThinPrintOverSSL 0m Off O9 Press A or V to select whether Thin Print over SSL is enabled 10 Press OK The Thin Print is set and the ThinPrint menu reappears LAN Interface LAN Interface setting Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select LAN Interface 2 Press OK The LAN Interface screen appears LAN Interface Ui 1 Auto The available LAN Interfaces are as follows 10BASE Half Auto 10BASE Full 10BASE Half 10BASE Full 1
212. intain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded
213. inter emitting steam in the area around the top tray if you use damp paper but it is safe amp to continue printing A 20 Appendix Special Paper The following types of special paper can be used Paper Type to be Used Paper Type to be Selected Overhead projector transparencies Transparency Rough paper Rough Thin paper Vellum Label Labels Recycled paper Recycled Preprinted paper Preprinted Bond paper Bond Postcards Cardstock Colored paper Color Prepunched paper Prepunched Letterhead Letterhead Envelopes Envelope Thick paper Thick High quality paper High Quality Custom Custom 1 8 Use paper that is sold specifically for use with copiers or printers heat fusing type When using labels thin paper postcards or thick paper feed the paper from the MP tray For details refer to MP Tray Set MP tray settings on page 4 30 Since the composition and quality of special paper vary considerably special paper is more likely than white bond paper to give trouble during printing No liability will be assumed if moisture and so forth given off during printing on special paper causes harm to the machine or operator Note Before purchasing any type of special paper test a sample on the machine and check that printing quality is amp N satisfactory Transparency To prevent printing problems feed transparenci
214. ion to the jobs printed from computers it is also possible to check reports such as status pages and jobs printed directly from USB memory The information available in the Job Status is listed below Results Displayed Item Content Display Icon Description Job Name Job name Job name Job name Status Job status Processing EJ Printing Pause I Printing suspended Canceling Job canceled Job Type Job type Printer A Printed from a PC Report Report USB ue Printed from USB memory Box c Printed from Job Box Accepted Time Job reception time Day Month Year Hour Minutet Month Day Year Hour Minutet Year Month Day Hour MinuteT User Name Printed user name User name Printed Pages Pages printed Page s No of pages p a Copies completed Copies specified T The display differs depending on the countries or regions 1 Inthe status menu press A or V to select Job Status Job Status 2 Press OK Job Status is displayed and a list is displayed of the job numbers and job names of the jobs currently being printed or awaiting printing Also the type of job and results are indicated for each job using icons 3 Press or V to select the name of the job whose details you want to view Job 0006 Detail ame Detail PES oK 1 6 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST 4 Press Detail Right Select The Detail screen appears The detailed job
215. is an explanation of the method for setting for IPv4 but TCP IP should also be On when setting for IPv6 4 Select TCP IP Settings andpress OK The TCP IP Settings A TCP IP Settings Ij menu screen appears TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit 5 Press A or V to select TCP IP 6 Press OK The TCP IP screen appears TCP IP Sard OK Off 7 Check that on is selected If of is selected then press A or V to select On Note is displayed for the setting which has been selected 8 Press OK The TCP IP setting is set and the TCP IP Settings TCP IP Settings mMm menu reappears TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit Switching DHCP to Off or On Select On when using a DHCP server to automatically obtain an IP Address Select Off to enter an IP Address 9 Press A or V to select IPv4 Setting 10 Press OK The 1Pv4 Setting menu screen appears IPv4 Setting Dn Auto IP IP Address Exit 11 Press A or V to select DHCP 12 Press OK The DHCP screen appears DHCP Pad OK Off 13 Press A or V to select Off or On Preparation before Use 14 Press OK The DHCP setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu IPv4 Setting Ui reappears Auto IP Note DHCP becomes effective when On is selected Press IP Address SJ Menu to end the mode selection menu gical When off is set continue on to enter th
216. it for SMTP server If not enter a value of 0 zero to enable E mail sending regardless of the size limit Sender Address Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E mails such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Signature Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is often used for further identification of the machine The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Function Defaults Change the function default settings in Common Job Default Settings page t Besure to enter the items 8 Click Submit 2 22 Preparation before Use Creating a New Custom Box You can register a custom box from Command Center RX Note To use Custom Box an optional SSD must be installed in the machine 1 Launch your Web browser 2 Inthe address or location bar enter the machine s IP address or the A host name E 1018087 Note Print the status page to check the machine s IP et ee RES MA Eg E amp N address and the host name For details refer to Status Page Printing a printer s status page on page 4 12 Command Ce 3 From the Document Box menu click Custom Box lated 17 02 02 50 54 Last Upda 2014 0 4 C
217. ize can be changed Font Font Type Font ID Courier Size 4 00 999 75 IPAE point 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Font 2 Press OK The Font menu screen appears 3 Press or V to select Courier If you are selecting the thickness of the Letter Gothic font choose Letter Gothic here instead 4 Press OK The Courier screen appears 5 Press A or V to select Regular or Dark 6 Press OK The font thickness is set and the Font menu reappears 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Font 2 Press OK The Font menu screen appears 3 Press or V to select Size 4 Press OK The Size entry screen appears 5 Press or V to enter the font size Note The font size can be set between 4 00 and 999 75 points in 0 25 point increments 4 48 Operation Panel Character Pitch You can set the character pitch for fixed fonts Font m Font Type Font ID Courier Exit Pitch pa OK 0 44 99 99 30 00 lt Code Set Setting the code set Press OK The font size is set and the Font menu reappears Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Font Press OK The Font menu screen appears Press A or V to select Pitch Press OK The Pitch entry screen appears Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the character pitch Note The character pitch can be set between 0 44 a
218. job name Press OK The Job Name setting is set and the Print Settings menu reappears 4 56 Operation Panel Network Network settings This printer supports TCP IP and TCP IP IPv6 protocols IP is an abbreviation for Internet Protocol This printer routinely uses the TCP IP IPv4 protocol but provides a separate setting for the next generation IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv4 uses 32 bit IP addresses but the rapid growth in the number of Internet users has resulted in a shortage of IP addresses IPv6 was developed to expand the range of available IP addresses by using 128 bit IP addresses The options available in the Network settings are as follows TCP IP Enable Disable TCP IP 4 57 Pv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings 4 58 Pv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings 4 61 Protocol Detail Detailed settings for the network protocol 4 63 Restart Network Restarting the network card 4 64 Note Check with your network administrator when selecting the network setting After all network related settings have been done restart the network Refer to Restart Network Restarting the network card on page 4 64 This is mandatory to make the settings effective When Command Center RX is used network parameters and security settings can be conveniently changed and checked from your PC For more information refer to the Command Center RX User Guide 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select Network 3 Press OK The Network
219. k Size 2 Press OK The RAM Disk Size screen appears RAM Disk Size Dn 1 16 IM MB 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the amount of memory to be used as a RAM disk The maximum amount of memory that can be set varies depending on the total amount of memory in the printer 4 Press OK The amount of memory used as a RAM disk is stored and the RAM Disk Setting menu reappears When you have completed the setting exit the menu and restart the printer The selected setting is valid after the printer starts up again 4 83 Operation Panel Format SSD Formatting the SSD When an optional SSD is inserted into the printer for the first time it must be formatted before use This menu is displayed only when the SSD is installed on the printer Note If the SSD is installed in the printer the Document Box will be available Formatting will destroy any existing SV data on a storage device including a used SSD Formatting of the SSD must be executed from the printer When the SSD has not yet been formatted the Attention indicator flashes and Format SSD is displayed Use the procedure below to format the SSD When a new SSD is inserted in the printer s slot Format SSD will appear on the message display 1 Inthe Device Common menu press or V to select Format SSD 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Format Are you sure SSD Yes No 3 Press Yes Left Sel
220. k in Restart To use this function this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol In addition configure the following SMTP settings Item SMTP Protocol and SMTP Server Name in SMTP The sender address when the machine sends E mails Item Sender Address in E mail Send Settings The setting to limit the size of E mails Item E mail Size Limit in E mail Send Settings The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below 2 20 Preparation before Use n 10 1808 t Y D v Pagev Safety v Tools v e ey KYOCERA Command Ce Admin Login Le User Name Admin Password LELLES Print Protocols NetBEUI amp on or Workgroup 5 device information gt Comment 5 f ob status E 2 FP Document Box gt Fi ooves settings gt LPD on or FTP Server Reception E On or Port Number 031 1 32767 APP over SSL On or Port Number p 1 32767 IPP over SSL Certificate Device Certificate 4 Selings Q Security Settings gt Send Protocols SMTP E mail D SWTP Security of Other Protocols SNMPVAW2c on or SNIPS on e or Note cr moresetings aichere SNIP Sstinas HTTP or or HTTPS on or To use these settings enable SSL Network Securite HTTPS Certificate Device Certificate 1 Setinas Enhances WS
221. k paper or transparency click Media type menu and select the media type 7 Click Source and select the paper source Note If you choose Auto source selection paper is supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type To print on special paper such as envelopes or thick paper place it on the multi purpose tray and rm select MP Tray rax Save As udata LI rint preview A KYOCERA LEER 8 Select paper orientation either Portrait or Landscape to match the orientation of the document 9 Click OK to return to the Print dialog box 10 Click OK to start printing 1 While the printer displays Processing press Cancel The Job Cancel List appears showing the list of current print jobs 2 Press A or V to display the desired job and then press OK When the Job will be canceled Are you sure message appears press Yes Left Select to cancel the job or No 2 asc Right Select to cancel this operation and continue printing 5 T Document Box When you cancel a job Canceling appears on the message cm md display and printing stops after the page currently printing has been fed output 0 gt 3 2 Printing Printer Driver Print Settings Screen The printer driver print settings screen allows you
222. l Info Personal information setting 4 20 1 Inthe Report menu press A or V to select Job Log History 2 Press OK The Job Log History menu appears Job Log History mMm Auto Sending Note If something other than Show A11 is set at Disp Send History SJ Status Log Display Status Log setting page 4 94 then the Destination log in screen appears Enter the login user name and Exit password and press Login Right Select Auto Sending Automatic Sending of Job Log History This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destination whenever a set number of jobs has been logged Set the destinations in advance by referring to Destination Setting the destination on page 4 18 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press A or V to select Auto Sending 2 Press OK The Auto Sending menu appears Auto Sending m Exit 3 Press A or V to select Of On 4 Press OK The o On screen appears Off On Pata OK eras On 5 Press A or V to select On or Off 6 Press OK The Auto Sending is set and the Job Log History menu reappears Job Log History Mm Auto Sending Send History If On is selected continue on and select the settings Destination Exit 7 Press A or V to select Auto Sending 4 16 Operation Panel Auto Sending m 03O On Exit Jobs Ui 1 100 E
223. l be placed on the right of the selected file 30001 Box 01 mm Data 01 lof Select the checkmarked file and press Select Right Select hData 02 Ei again to cancel the selection Menu Select Note To select all files follow the steps of Select Deselect All J Files on page 5 14 5 13 Document Box Select Deselect All Files All files in the Custom Box are selected Print a File 30001 Box 01 Pad OK fAData 01 oO fAData 02 oO Menu Select 30001 Box 01 m Data 01 x S Data 02 ut Menu Select 30001 Box 01 m Data 01 Hn Data 02 Hn Menu Select Print the file s selected in the Custom Box 30001 Box 01 m Print ChangeSet Delete Copies Red OK 1 999 2 copies Accepted In the file list screen press A or V to select All Files Press Select Right Select When there is a file not checked in the Custom Box all files will be checkmarked When all files in the Custom Box are checked all checkmarked files are deselected In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print Delete menu screen appears Press or V to select Print Press OK The Copies menu screen appears If you want to change the number of remaining copies to be printed use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the number of copies to be printed Note If Job Accounting is enab
224. lect whether or not to use WSD Print The default setting is On 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select WSD PRINT 2 Press OK The WSD PRINT screen appears WSD PRINT pag OK Off 3 Press A or V to select whether WSD PRINT is enabled 4 Press OK The WSD PRINT setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears 4 99 Operation Panel Enhanced WSD Enhanced WSD setting Set whether to use our proprietary web services Network driver use this Enhanced WSD Web service The default setting is On 1 IntheNetwork Security menu press A or V to select Enhanced WSD 2 Press OK The Enhanced WSD screen appears Enhanced WSD m Off 3 Press A or V to select whether Enhanced WSD is enabled 4 Press OK The Enhanced WSD setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears EnhancedWSD SSL Enhanced WSD SSL setting Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL SSL must be set to on in SSL SSL Server setting on page 4 101 The default setting is On 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select EnhancedWSD SSL 2 Press OK The EnhancedWSD SSL screen appears EnhancedWSD SSL 0m Off 3 Press or V to select whether Enhanced WSD SSL is enabled 4 Press OK The Enhanced WSD SSL setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears IPP IPP setting IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a stand
225. lected in this setting a tone sounds each time a USB keyboard is used The default setting is Of f 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Keyboard Confirm z 2 Press OK The Keyboard Confirm screen appears Keyboard Confirm Mm 01Off 02 On 3 Press A or V to select whether the keyboard confirmation tone is enabled 4 Press OK The Keyboard Confirm tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears RAM Disk Setting Using the RAM disk The RAM disk is a memory space shared within the printer memory that can temporarily store print jobs The stored print job can then be used to print multiple copies of the job reducing the total amount of time required to print the whole job It acts similar to the SSD except that the data is effective only when the printer is powered up To use the RAM disk activate and enter the desired size of the RAM disk in the manner described below The maximum RAM disk size can be calculated as follows When the RAM disk is activated The maximum RAM disk size is 16 MB when no options are attached When the optional memory is installed the setting range varies depending on the amount of optional memory By default the RAM disk is set to On To activate RAM disk in the printer s memory first you must set the RAM disk mode to on and set the desired data size for the RAM disk as described in the following section This allows you to perform the following operations on the RAM di
226. lection changes Report 4 10 USB Memory 4 21 Counter 4 29 Paper Settings 4 30 Print Settings 4 41 Network 4 57 Optional Network 4 65 Device Common 4 76 Security 4 98 User Job Account 4 110 Adjust Maint 4 130 Op Functions 4 133 Z Note Optional Network is only displayed when a 9 Network Interface Kit IB 50 or Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 is installed as an option USB Memory is only displayed when USB memory is installed 4 9 Operation Panel Report These are the settings for printing reports and sending the Job Log History The options available in the Report menu are as follows Report Print 4 10 Job Log History Sending Job Log History 4 16 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select Report 3 Press OK The Report menu appears Report v OK Note When user login administration is enabled Job Log 2 0b Log History History is displayed when logged in with administrator authority Exit Report Print Prints a report The options available in the Report Print menu are as follows Menu Map Printing a menu map 4 10 Status Page Printing a printer s status page 4 12 Font List Printing a list of the printer s fonts 4 14 RAM File List Printing a list of the files on the RAM disk 4 15 SSD File List Printing a list of the files on the SSD 4 15 SD Card FileList Printing a list of the
227. led enter the account ID in the login screen that appears The Copies menu screen appears after login is displayed first and it means it according to the set number of copies when the data of each file is preserved In this setting each set number of copies is printed Press OK The message Accepted appears and printing begins When On is selected in the Del afterPrint Setting for file deletion after printing on page 5 9 the selected file will be deleted from the Custom Box after it is printed Document Box Print a File Changes to the print settings To change the print settings for a file selected in a Custom Box and print it 1 In the file list screen select the item and press OK The Print Delete menu screen appears 30001 Box 01 m Print ChangeSet Delete 2 Press or V to select Print ChangeSet 3 Press OK The Copies menu screen appears Copies El 1 999 If you want to change the number of remaining copies to be printed copies use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the number of copies to be printed Function Note If Job Accounting is enabled enter the account ID in the login screen that appears The Copies menu screen appears after login Function Right Select can be pressed to change the print settings For details refer to Print Function Settings on page 5 15 4 Press OK The Paper Source menu screen appears Paper Source m l R
228. lick Add 5 Enterthe box details Enter the information for the custom box you want to register For details on the fields to populate refer to Command Center RX User Guide 6 Click Submit Printing a Document Stored in a Custom Box A document stored in a Custom Box can be printed from Command Center RX 1 Launch your Web browser i 2 Inthe address or location bar enter the machine s IP address or the host name Note Print the status page to check the machine s IP hB H ce MESE Safety Tools G fii amp address and the host name For details refer to Status Page KYOCERA Printing a printer s status page on page 4 12 Command Ce 2 23 Preparation before Use Document Box Custom Box Box 01 Box 02 Box 03 Iob Box Settings SFBpevce settings gt Dios Settings gt mgeseksems gt Lest Updated 2014 07 02 02 50 54 Size 320 0 KB 00KB 00K amp 1 3 3 box s 2x Documents Document Box Custom Box G pevce information gt Select Typ File Name a fob Status amp gt B PEE DE B Job Box Settings TEST bot Note 070214 114749548 TEST bot Note 070214 114923991 TEST bt Noto 07024 114944308 bees e gt 3 3 Selected TB rs BZ rena sene gt 1 Lest Updated 2014 07 02 02 52 15 Date 2014 07 02 2014 07 02 2014 07 02 4 3 3 document s 3 From the Document Box menu click Custom Box 4 Click the number
229. logging in using the numeric keys on the ID card login screen When Permit is set KeyLogin is displayed on the login screen and it is possible to log in by entering the Login User Name and Login Password using the numeric keys When Prohibit is set it is not possible to log in using the numeric keys 1 Inthe Ip card Settings menu press A or V to select Key Login 4 119 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The Key Login screen appears Key Login Prohibit 3 Press A or V to select Permit or Prohibit 4 Press OK The ID Card Settings menu reappears Additional Auth Setting for additional authentication This sets whether or not to require the entry of a Login Password or PIN Personal Identification Number after authentication using an ID card When set to On the Login Password or PIN entry screen is displayed after the ID card is authenticated Note This setting is only displayed when Ext has been set as the Server Type Server type selection on page 4 N 113 When Use PIN is selected in this setting even if the PIN Login is set to Off you can enter PIN for additional authentication 1 Inthe ID Card Settings menu press A or V to select Additional Auth 2 Press OK The Additional Auth screen appears Additional Auth 0m 01 off Use Password Use PIN 3 Press A or V to select Off Use Password or Use PIN 4 Press OK The ID Card Settings menu reappears 4 120 Ope
230. ministrator s Login User Name and Login Password must be entered For details of the administrator settings refer to Administrator on page 4 117 The options available in Timer Setting are as follows Auto Panel Reset Auto panel reset setting 4 88 PanelReset Timer Setting the panel reset timer 4 88 Sleep Level Set Sleep level setting 4 89 Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time 4 91 Power Off Rule Power Off Rule setting 4 91 Power Off Timer Power off timer settings 4 92 Auto Err Clear Auto error clear setting 4 92 Err Clear Timer Setting the error clear time 4 93 FormFeed TimeOut Automatic form feed timeout setting 4 93 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Timer Setting 2 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name l Note When user login administration is set Login Password When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Timer Setting menu screen is Login displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator R 3 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name E Login User Name entry screen is displayed ABC Text 4 Enterthe Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator
231. mulation n IBM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 1 2 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Emulation Set Press OK The Emulation Set menu screen appears Press A or V to select Alt Emulation Press OK The Alt Emulation screen appears showing a list of the available alternative emulations The available alternative emulations are as follows PCL6 IBM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 Line Printer Press or V to select the desired alternative emulation Press OK The alternative emulation is set and the Emulation Set menu reappears 4 46 Operation Panel Font Selecting the default font You can select the default font The default font can be one of the internal fonts or a font that is downloaded to the printer memory or stored on SD card or SSD In this menu you can also set the type and pitch for Courier and Letter Gothic The options available in Font menu are as follows Selecting Regular or Dark Courier Letter Gothic 4 48 Changing the Default Font Size 4 48 Character Pitch 4 49 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Font 2 Press OK The Font menu screen appears Font 0 Font Type Font ID Courier Exit 3 Press or V to select Font Type 4 Press OK The Font Type screen appears Font Type m 01 Internal Option 5 Toselecta font built in the printer press A or V to select Intern
232. n Of CORI ce A 9 sais A 16 si A A A AAe5O5 A 26 For availability of the options consult your service technician Appendix Character Entry Method In character entry screens use the procedure below to enter characters Keys Used Use the following keys to enter characters Document Box Back Key Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen Numeric Keys Use these keys to select the character you want to enter Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter When Text is displayed Arrow Keys Use these to select the entry position or select a character from the character list OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character s our wn Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position If the cursor is at the end of the line the character to the left of it is deleted A 2 Appendix Selecting Type of Characters To enter characters the following three types are available File Name Entry mMm doci r 29 9 ABC a vexc Curr
233. n Panel n Function ENS OK Quiet Mode Duplex EcoPrint EcoPrint Ok 01Off On Function lt OK Quiet Mode Duplex EcoPrint n Md OK a File Name Entry aoci ABC Text 4 Press or V to select the desired duplex printing mode The message display toggles through the following Off default Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge Selecting o f disables duplex printing 5 Press OK The duplex printing mode is set and the Funct ion menu reappears EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode Set EcoPrint mode For details refer to EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode on page 4 50 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears 2 Press A or V to select EcoPrint 3 Press OK The EcoPrint screen appears 4 Press or V to select the EcoPrint mode 5 Press OK The EcoPrint mode is set and the Function menu reappears File Name Entry Entering a file name Enter the file name The file name entered is displayed as the Job Name in the Job Status and Job Log 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears 2 Press A or V to select File Name 3 Press OK The File Name Entry Entry Screen appears 4 Enterthe file name using the numeric keys Note Up to 32
234. n is selected in this setting a tone sounds when printing ends The default setting is Off 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Job Finish 2 Press OK The Job Finish screen appears Job Finish OK 03 off On 3 Press A or V to select whether the printing completed tone is enabled 4 Press OK The printing completed tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears Ready Preparation completed tone setting When On is selected in this setting a tone sounds when print preparation has been completed The default setting is Of f 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Ready 2 Press OK The Ready screen appears Ready Dn 01 kOff On 3 Press or V to select whether the preparation completed tone is enabled 4 Press OK The preparation completed tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears Operation Panel Error Error tone setting When On is selected in this setting a tone sounds when a problem such as running out of paper or a paper jam occurs during printing The default setting is On 1 Inthe Buzzer menu screen press A or V to select Error 2 Press OK The Error screen appears Error 0 01 off 02 On 3 Press A or V to select whether the warning tone is enabled 4 Press OK The warning tone setting is set and the Buzzer menu reappears Keyboard Confirm Keyboard confirmation tone setting When On is se
235. n press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Name is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed 4 78 Operation Panel Login User Name wm 4000 Login Password ccx Date Setting OK Time Date Format Exit Date date setting Date Pad OK Month Day Year EI o 2014 Time Zone Greenwich Time time setting Time Dn Hour Min Second EB 55 50 Time Zone Greenwich Date Format date format selection Date Format m Month Day Year 02 Day Month Year Year Month Day 7 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login v Password is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 8 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the Date Setting menu appears showing a list of available options 1 Inthe Date setting menu press A or V to select Date 2 Press OK The Date screen appears 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the year month and day Use lt and gt to move the c
236. n printer to prevent unauthorized access Stored Job To electronically store documents such as fax cover pages Start storing by Adding more boxes Printer driver Yes to a maximum of 1 000 boxes Printer driver No Password setting Yes Yes possible in Private Print and Stored Job Data after printing Stored Stored except Private Print Support for User Login Yes The users can be set No Administration separately for each Box SSD installation Available Available RAM disk use Not available Available Only Proof and Hold and Private Print can be used Note For information on the optional SSD refer to About the Options on page A 5 For information on the RAM disk refer to RAM Disk Setting Using the RAM disk on page 4 82 For the formatting of the SSD refer to Format SSD Formatting the SSD on page 4 84 5 2 Document Box Custom Box IMPORTANT To use a Custom Box an optional SSD must be installed in the printer The SSD must be formatted from the printer For more information refer to Format SSD Formatting the SSD on page 4 84 The Custom Box is a general purpose box which allows the user to save print data on the printer s SSD and then re use it whenever necessary The transmission of data to save in the box is done with the printer driver For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide Use the printer s operation panel to print the print data stor
237. n the printer s slot the contents of the SD SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or automatically when you power on or reset the printer Installing and Formatting the SD SDHC Memory Card To use an unused SD SDHC memory card you must first use the printer to format the SD SDHC memory card 1 Switch off the printer remove the power cord and then remove the main controller unit To read how to remove the main controller unit refer to the section on inserting the memory module 2 Insert the SD SDHC memory card into the SD SDHC memory card SD SDHC i slot Memory Card Slot 3 Attach the main controller unit to the printer in the reverse procedure to when it was removed 4 Format the SD SDHC memory card from the operation panel For the procedure for formatting refer to Format SD Card Formatting the SD card on page 4 84 PF 4100 Paper Feeder The optional paper feeder PF 4100 will each hold approximately 500 sheets of paper Up to 4 optional feeders can be added to the bottom of the printer allowing continuous feeding of up to 2 500 sheets of paper when combined with the printer s own cassette IMPORTANT When you use the paper feeder place the papers print side down For details of the supported paper sizes refer to Selecting the Right Paper on page A 18 For the paper type setting refer to Media Type Setting the cassette paper type on page 4 36 A 9 Appendix SSD HD 6 HD 7 With SSD ins
238. nberger Gasse 95 1230 Vienna Austria Phone 43 1 863380 Fax 43 1 86338 400 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista Sweden Phone 46 8 546 550 00 Fax 46 8 546 550 10 KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf Postboks 150 Oppsal 0619 Oslo Norway Phone 47 22 62 73 00 Fax 47 22 62 72 00 KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A S Ejby Industrivej 60 DK 2600 Glostrup Denmark Phone 45 70223880 Fax 45 45765850 KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda Rua do Centro Cultural 41 Alvalade 1700 106 Lisboa Portugal Phone 351 21 843 6780 Fax 351 21 849 3312 KYOCERA Document Solutions South Africa Pty Ltd KYOCERA House Hertford Office Park 90 Bekker Road Cnr Allandale Midrand South Africa Phone 27 11 540 2600 Fax 27 11 466 3050 KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC Building 2 51 4 Schepkina St 129110 Moscow Russia Phone 7 495 741 0004 Fax 7 495 741 0018 KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East Dubai Internet City Bldg 17 Office 157 P O Box 500817 Dubai United Arab Emirates Phone 971 04 433 0412 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc 2 28 1 chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 81 6 6764 3555 http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com cy KYOCERA Document Solutions
239. nd 99 99 characters per inch in 0 01 character per inch increments Press OK The character pitch is set and the Font menu reappears You can change the character code set Available character code sets vary depending on the current font The default is IBM PC 8 Code Set mm IBM PC 8 D N IBM PC 850 In the Print Settings menu press A or V to select Code Set Press OK The Code Set screen appears listing the available character code sets Press A or V to select the desired character code set Press OK The character code set is setand the Print Settings menu reappears 4 49 Operation Panel Print Quality Setting print quality In Print Quality menus you can set the KIR mode EcoPrint mode and other settings The options available in Print Quality are as follows KIR Selecting the KIR mode 4 50 EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode 4 50 Print Resolution Selecting the Print Resolution 4 51 Print Density Selecting the Print Density 4 51 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Print Quality 2 Press OK The Print Quality menu screen appears Print Quality lt 0 KIR EcoPrint Print Resolution Exit KIR Selecting the KIR mode This printer incorporates the KIR Kyocera Image Refinement smoothing function KIR uses the software to enhance resolution resulting in high quality printing at resolution of 600 dpi and 300 dpi
240. nd gt to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted 4 Press OK The subnet mask setting is stored and the 1Pv4 Setting menu reappears Default Gateway Gateway setting Gateway generally refers to a protocol conversion device used to allow networks with differing protocol systems to interconnect For example a Gateway device is required to connect a different closed network using its own protocols to the open Internet using TCP IP By installing a gateway the communications protocols and data display modes on different networks can be made compatible On TCP IP networks the term gateway is used to refer to routers Note Before you enter the gateway be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off 1 Inthe rPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select Default Gateway 2 Press OK The Default Gateway screen appears Default Gateway Mm EB gt v o 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the default gateway You can set any value between 000 and 255 Increase or reduce the figures by pressing A or V Use lt and gt to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted 4 Press OK The default gateway is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears Bonjour Bonjour setting Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP proto
241. nd paper source settings You can print the status page from the operation panel Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off Glossary 3 Glossary TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvemen
242. nt management window appears click Yes Allow 2 7 Preparation before Use 2 Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement Notice Click Accept By using or installing the device drivers and software included in this package you agree to become bound by the terms and conditions of this license agreement a 3 Select Express Install tab Note To install Status Monitor it is necessary to install SJ Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 beforehand e Setup has detected that the following prerequisites have not been met Ad muttiple cevces and painting tite Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 www microsoft com g a ai 4 Select the device to be installed Select the device you want to sce You can also select Use host name for port name and set to use the host name of the standard TCP IP port A USB connection cannot be used eres Use host gh Note The machine cannot be detected unless it is on If the pectet gosse mewn tse SJ computer fails to detect the machine verify that it is p s connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on and click Reload 2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc 5 Select the package to be installed Select the device you want to sce Packages include the following software Driver Package KX
243. nt several pages to confirm whether the printer can feed the paper To feed thick paper smoothly you can select the half speed mode from the printer driver For more information refer to Half Speed Mode Printer Driver Settings on page 3 6 Possible Paper Jam Locations The figure below shows the printer s paper paths including the optional paper feeder The locations where paper jams might occur are also shown here with each location explained in the table below Paper jams can occur in more than one component on the paper paths Paper Jam Message paper ru Description Heletence location Page A Paper is jammed at the MP tray page 8 18 Paper jammed at MP tray B Paper is jammed at the paper cassette The page 8 18 Paper cassette number can be 1 topmost to 5 jammed in bottom Cassette 1 C Paper is jammed inside the duplex section page 8 19 Paper jammed in the back Ot Casi 8 16 Troubleshooting Paper Jam Message iae jam Description OG e ocation Page D Paper is jammed inside the printer page 8 20 Paper jammed inside main unit E Paper is jammed inside the rear unit page 8 22 Paper jammed in rear cover General Considerations for Clearing Jams Bear in mind the following considerations when attempting paper jam removal If paper jams occur frequently
244. ntering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login SV Password is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the TonerAlert Level menu screen appears Press A or V to select Of On 10 Press OK The o 0n screen appears 11 Press A or V to select whether Toner Alert Level is enabled 4 96 Operation Panel TonerAlert Level M Off On TonerAlert Level Exit TonerAlert Level Mm 5 100 12 Press OK The TonerAlert Level screen appears 13 Press or V to select TonerAlert Level 14 Press OK The TonerAlert Level screen appears 15 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the level at which an alert will be displayed The setting is possible between 5 and 100 16 Press OK The Toner Alert Level is set and the TonerAlert Level menu reappears 4 97 Operation Panel Security Security function setting The security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data IMPORTANT To change the Security function se
245. ntion to or incorrect A compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or A incorrect compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol AN General warning A Warning of high temperature The amp symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol Q Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol o Alert of required action Remove the power plug from the outlet Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required Note An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases SJ because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function Contents Legal arid Safety Informalion oot eee EL EH N iii 1 Machine Parts Components at the
246. ob Account Set Job Account setting on page 4 121 SD card error Press OK tit An SD card error has occurred Look at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 02 The printer does not support the SD card inserted or the SD card is broken Install the correct SD card For details refer to SD SDHC Memory Card on page A 9 03 The SD card is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command 04 There is not enough space in the SD card Delete unnecessary files or use a new SD card 05 The desired file does not exist in the SD card Stored the file in the SD card 10 The file stored in the SD card is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command 8 13 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action SSD error Press OK tit An SSD error has occurred Look at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 03 The SSD is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using the command 04 There is no available SSD space Delete unnecessary files etc in order to free up space 05 The desired file does not exist in the SSD Stored the file in the SSD 10 The file stored in the SSD is write protected using command operation Remove the write protection using
247. of the printer Back Key Back Cancels the menu setting currently displayed and returns to the menu for the previous step Operation Panel Arrow Keys A lt gt V The four arrow keys are used in the menu system to access an item or enter numeric values OK Key Me Finalize settings of numeric values and other selections Numeric Keys 1 2 ABC 3 DEF d J Mas 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 mno C C C 7JPar 81v 9 wxvz C3 Cc CJ 0 X aera C C Enter numbers and symbols Clear Key C Clear C Clears entered numbers and characters Document Box Key e Document Box C Press this key when using Document Box For details refer to Document Box on page 5 1 4 5 Operation Panel Left Select Key Right Select Key c5 ca These keys only function when the respective key tabs are shown in the message display Pressing the key executes the function shown in the message display Pressing the key executes the function shown in the message display E g When the menu shown below is displayed pressing Left Select Yes prints the file selected Pressing Right Select No stops printing and returns to the menu for the previous step Print Are you sure Menu Map Yes No These keys only function when the paper jam message has appeared on the message display A hel
248. ogin User Name mMm ABC Text Login User Name OK 4000 Login Password Login n Login Password Ui ABC Text Press OK The FormFeed TimeOut screen appears Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the form feed timeout delay Press OK The form feed timeout setting is stored and the Timer Setting menu reappears Disp Status Log Display Status Log setting Set the display method of the Status Log In the Device Common menu press A or V to select Disp Status Log Press OK The Login screen appears Note When user login administration is set _ When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Disp Status Log menu screen is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name entry screen is displayed Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User SS Name is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed 4 94 Operation Panel Login User Name wm 4000 Login Password
249. on Panel 4 Enter the Preshared Key using the numeric keys Note The number of characters is between 8 and 64 For SJ details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 5 Press OK The Encryption menu reappears Basic Basic settings for the optional Network Interface Kit This selects the basic settings for the optional Network Interface Kit IB 50 or optional Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 network 1 Inthe Optional Network menu press A or V to select Basic 2 Press OK The Basic menu screen appears Basic v En The following operations are possible NetWare TCP IP Settings TCP IP Settings for the optional Network AppleTalk Interface Kit 4 72 Exit Netware NetWare setting 4 73 AppleTalk AppleTalk setting 4 73 PSec IPSec setting 4 73 LAN Interface LAN Interface setting 4 74 e MACAddressFilter MAC address filtering setting 4 74 Restart Network Restarting the optional Network Interface Kit 4 74 TCP IP Settings TCP IP Settings for the optional Network Interface Kit This selects the TCP IP settings The options available in the TCP IP Settings are as follows TCP IP Enable Disable TCP IP Pv4 Setting TCP IP IPv4 settings Pv6 Setting TCP IP IPv6 settings 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select TCP IP Settings 2 Press OK The TCP IP Settings menu screen appears TCP IP Settings lt Mm
250. on of replacement with the new Maintenance Kit resets the total number of Maintenance Kit print images This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel Note The Maintenance menu is displayed only when Replace MK appears Yes No New Developer This specifies the setting for confirmation of replacement with the new Developer resets the total number of Developer print images This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel Yes No Auto DrumRefresh An automatic drum refresh is sometimes carried out when the power supply is Switched on or when the machine recovers from sleep mode In order to maintain the image quality the automatic drum refresh is implemented automatically after observing the surrounding temperature and humidity Here the time for carrying out the automatic drum refresh is set Normally set it to Standard If Off or Short is selected the best image quality may not be kept Off Short Standard Long Drum This sets the refresh mode for the drum When the printing quality declines Yes No refreshing the drum can restore the printing quality This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel Altitude Adj This sets the altitude adjustment mode If you are using the machine at an Normal High 1 altitude of 1500 m or higher and print quality has deteriorated the Altitude High 2 Adjustment mode setting can be used to restore print quality MC This sets the output
251. or Rear Tray FaceUp 4 Press OK The output stack is set and the Print Settings menu reappears 4 44 Operation Panel Override A4 LTR Overriding difference between A4 and Letter When the Override A4 LTR is turned On using the operation panel the printer ignores the difference between A4 and Letter paper sizes Printing is performed without an error message even if the actual paper size in the current cassette differs from the paper size formatting the job By default this feature is On 1 2 Override A4 LTR Mm 01 Off On 3 4 Emulation Setting the emulation Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Override A4 LTR Press OK The Override A4 LTR screen appears Press A or V to select Off or On Press OK The Print Settings menu reappears You can change the emulation mode Use the procedure below to select the mode Note To print the PDF file using FTP printing set emulation to KPDL 1 2 Emulation Set Dn Emulation Exit 3 4 Emulation i 01 PCL6 IBM Proprinter EPSON LQ 850 5 6 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V toselect Emulation Set Press OK The Emulation Set menu screen appears Press A or V to select Emulation Press OK The Emulation screen appears showing a list of the available emulations The defaults differ depending on the delivery destination The available emulations ar
252. or old toner container and old waste toner box Installation Guide IMPORTANT During toner container replacement temporarily move storage media and computer supplies such as floppy disks and USB memories away from the toner container This is to avoid damaging media by the magnetism of toner Always clean the inside of the printer after replacing the toner container For details refer to Cleaning the Printer on page 7 9 Kyocera Document Solutions Inc is not liable against any damages or problems arising from the use of toner containers other than those designated as original Kyocera toner containers For optimum performance it is also recommended to use only the Kyocera toner containers which are specifically intended for use in your country or region If the toner container for another destination is installed the printer will stop printing Note For best results we recommend that you only use genuine Kyocera Parts and Supplies Should any damage SJ be caused by the application of a toner other than the original toner then this damage is excluded from the guarantee Information Collection on Memory Chips The memory chip attached to the toner container is designed to improve convenience for the end user to support the recycling operation of empty toner containers and to gather information to support new product planning and development The information gathered is anonymous it cannot be associated to any specific individual and the d
253. ord 4 26 TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size 4 26 XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size 4 27 Quiet Mode Selecting the Quiet Mode Lower print speed for quiet processing Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable For details refer to Quiet Mode Setting the Quiet Mode on page 4 130 Note The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode This cannot be used when Prohibit is set for Each Job Permission for settings for each jobs on page 4 131 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press EE r D Function Right Select The Function menu appears Uie oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press A or V to select Quiet Mode 3 Press OK The Quiet Mode screen appears Quiet Mode mm 01 Off On 4 Press A or V to select On or off 5 Press OK The Quiet Mode is set and the Function menu reappears Duplex Setting the duplex printing Set duplex printing For details refer to Duplex Setting the duplex printing on page 4 43 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Cheers E lt i Function Right Select The Function menu appears uie oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press or V to select Duplex 3 Press OK The Duplex screen appears showing the list of available Duplex Md o duplex printing modes 01 kOff Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge 4 23 Operatio
254. ork 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name ael Note When user login administration is set Login Password When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Optional Network menu screen Login is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator 4 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name E Login User Name entry screen is displayed ABC Text 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User Name is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 6 Press or V to selectthe Login Password entry field Login User Name OK 4000 Login Password Login 7 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed A Login Password Ui ABC Text 4 65 Operation Panel Login User Name 4000 Login Password ccx Optional Network Mm Wireless Network Basic Communication Exit Wireless Network ConnectionStatus Quick Setup Custom Setup Exit ConnectionStatus Mm Status 1 2 Connected ConnectionStatus Mm Netwk
255. ormation refer to Duplex Setting the duplex printing on page 4 43 Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources Duplex mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased and thereby reduces cost It is recommended that machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default Resource Saving Paper For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels which meet EN 12281 2002 1 or an equivalent quality standard be used This machine also supports printing on 64 g m paper Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to further saving of forest resources 1 EN12281 2002 Printing and business paper Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Environmental benefits of Power Management To reduce power consumption when idle this machine is equipped with a power management function that automatically activates energy saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy saving mode a significant reduction in energy consumption is possible It is recommended that the machine
256. ource 4 Press OK The paper source is set and the Print Settings menu reappears 4 41 Operation Panel Auto Cass Change Auto Cassette Change setting You can select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing Off The printer displays Load paper cassette ftis a cassette number or Load paper in MP Tray and stops printing Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing To print from the other cassette press A1t Left Select Press A or V to select the desired paper source and then press OK On The printer continues printing automatically when the other cassette contains the same paper as the currently used paper cassette Auto Cass Change Off 1 2 In the Print Settings menu press A or V to select Auto Cass Change Press OK The Auto Cass Change screen appears showing the auto cassette change settings Press A or V to select Off or On Press OK The auto cassette change is set and the Print Settings menu reappears Zl Note You can also configure the Auto Cassette Change in J the Command Center RX Access to the Command Center RX and then go to Basic Defaults Device Defaults page For more information on access to the Command Center RX refer to the Command Center RX User Guide MP Tray Priority the settings for priority paper feed from the MP tray If paper is set in the MP
257. ox Name Entry TU Box oil ABC Text 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Box Name 2 Press appears 5 5 Edit Right Select The Box Name Entry screen Document Box Owner Owner settings When user login administration is enabled set the owner of the Box If the owner is not set then the owner name is displayed Permission settings for the sharing of a Box Detail M Owner 2 9 User 01 Change User setting m Network user None z Login User Name 0m ABC Domain Text 3 Enter the Box Name using the numeric keys Note Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters 4 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears 1 Inthe Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Owner 2 Press Change Right Select The User setting screen appears 3 Press A or V to select Network User Note If the owner will not be set then select None and press y OK 4 Press OK The Login User Name screen appears 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys Note Up to 64 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters If the domain has been registered Domain Left Select appears Press Domain Left Select and press or V to select the domain name 6 Press OK The
258. ox settings Set the details of the Box when necessary The items to set are different between when user login administration is not enabled when user login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with administrator authority and when user login administration is enabled and the user is logged in with user authority Detail KES Un Box Name 1 9 Box 01 Edit The detailed settings for the Box are as shown below User login On Setting User login Off Reference Page Administrator User Box Name Yes Yes Yes Box Name Change the Box name 5 5 Owner Yes No Owner Owner settings 5 6 Permission Yes Yes Permission settings for the sharing of a Box 5 6 Box Password Yes Yes Yes Box Password Box password setting 5 7 Box Number Yes Yes Yes Box number Change of the Box number 5 7 Usage Restrict Yes Yes No Usage Restrict Setting for maximum possible capacity usage 5 8 Auto File Del Yes Yes Yes Auto File Del Setting for automatic file deletion 5 8 Overwrite Set Yes Yes Yes Overwrite Set Setting of overwrite storage 5 9 Del afterPrint Yes Yes Yes Del afterPrint Setting for file deletion after printing 5 9 Yes The setting can be changed No The setting cannot be changed No setting Box Name Change the Box name Change the Box name Detail n Box Name 1 9 Box 01 Edit B
259. p message will then appear to facilitate jam clearing in the location 4 6 Operation Panel Using the Menu Selection System Menu Selection System This section explains how to use the menu selection system Menu on the operation panel allows you to use the menu to configure the printer settings to your specific needs Settings can be made when Ready to print Please wait Or Processing is indicated on the printer message display Note Settings that are received from application software and the printer driver will take priority over settings made in the operation panel Entering the Mode Selection Menu Press Menu when Ready to print is indicated on the printer message display The mode selection menu is displayed Ready to print Pla A4 mI A4 Status Toner Mode Selection Menu Scroll line The directions of usable arrow keys are shown on the screen displayed An asterisk is displayed to the left of the currently selected setting Menu Report Counter V Paper Settings Exit Press Press qp Scroll page key l Menu i LA Print Settings ui Paper Source i A A Print Settings Paper Source Th OQLMP Tray V Device Common MP Tray Priority Exit Exit lt D Operation Panel Selecting a Menu The mode selection menu is hierarchical Press V lt or gt to display the desired men
260. pears Press or V to select the desired Orientation Press OK The orientation is set and the Page Setting menu reappears This procedure instructs the printer what to do when it receives a linefeed code OAH LF Only Linefeed is performed Default LF and CR A linefeed and carriage return are performed Ignore LF The linefeed is ignored LF Action lt OK LF Only LF and CR Ignore LF 1 2 In the Page Setting menu press A or V to select LF Action Press OK The LF Action screen appears Press or V to select the desired action Press OK The action is set and the Page Setting menu reappears 4 54 Operation Panel CR Action Carriage Return This procedure instructs the printer what to do when it receives a carriage return code ODH CROnly A carriage return is performed Default LF and CR A linefeed and carriage return are performed Ignore CR The carriage return is ignored 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select CR Action 2 Press OK The CR Action screen appears CR Action m 1 CR Only LF and CR Ignore CR 3 Press or V to select the desired action 4 Press OK The action is set and the Page Setting menu reappears Wide A4 Wide A4 pitch Turn this to On to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page 78 characters at 10 pitches and Letter size page 80 character
261. pears Enter again from the new Security Password Overwrite all the data stored in the optional SSD when disposing of the printer IMPORTANT If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization the SSD might possibly crash or initialization might fail will start Are you sure Yes System Initialization No Task is completed Turn the power switch off and on In the SSD Initializ menu press A or V to select Initialization Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Press Yes Left Select The printer automatically restarts and then initialization starts If you do not wish to initialize press No Right Select The ssp Initializ menu reappears When the initialization is finished Task is completed is displayed Turn the power switch off and then on 4 108 Operation Panel DataSanitization Sanitizing the stored data This is to completely delete the address information registered on the machine and the stored image data IMPORTANT To complete this process requires about a few minutes when an SSD is not installed 30 minutes when an optional SSD HD 6 is installed and 2 hours when an optional SSD HD 7 is installed You can only performing this operation by logging in with machine administrator privileges It is not possible to cancel the process once it has started Remove the USB cable and network cable etc before performing this oper
262. play Bright screen appears showing the Display Bright Mm available brightness settings Darker 2 Da k r at The list shows the following brightness settings 03 Normal 0 Darker 2 Darker 1 Normal 0 Lighter 1 Lighter 2 3 Press A or V to select the desired brightness 4 Press OK The brightness is set and the Device Common menu reappears Disp Backlight Display backlight setting Set the backlight for the message display 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Disp Backlight 2 Press OK The Disp Backlight screen appears Disp Backlight Mm The list shows the following display backlight settings Off On Standard Touched off No backlight Touched Backlight lights up when the key on the operation panel is pressed Note If Touched is selected the backlight turns off again when the panel is reset after the setting time of Auto Panel Reset has passed or when Logout is pressed 3 Press A or V to select the desired backlight setting 4 Press OK The backlight setting is set and the Device Common menu reappears Error Handling Error detection setting This specifies the settings for the detection methods used for duplex printing errors and for paper size and paper type errors when the paper source is fixed The options available in Error Handling are as follows DuplexPaperError Duplex printing error detection setting 4 86 Paper Mi
263. r 2 Press OK The Power Off Timer screen appears Power Off Timer M 1 1 hour 2 hours 3 hours 3 Press A or V to select the time until the power goes off automatically The times that can be set are 1 hour 2 hours 3 hours 4 hours 5 hours 6 hours 9 hours 12 hours 1 day 2 days 3 days 4 days 5 days 6 days and 1 week 4 Press OK Set the time until the power switches off and the Timer Setting menu reappears Auto Err Clear Auto error clear setting If an error that still allows you to continue printing occurs the next received data is automatically printed after a set period of time elapses For example if the printer is shared over a network as a network printer and one person causes one of the above errors after the set period of time elapses the data sent from the next person is printed The default setting is off Auto Error Clear disabled The auto clear errors are Print overrun KPDL error SSD error RAM disk error 4 92 Operation Panel SD card error Incorrect account ID Account error Cannot duplex print on this paper Job Accounting restriction exceeded No multi copies USB memory error Restricted by Job Accounting Job not stored For the procedure for setting the automatic error recovery time refer to Err Clear Timer Setting the error clear time on page 4 93 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Auto Err Clear 2 Press OK The
264. r Completed appears and the account is deleted The once deleting o ga 00000007 of the account ends the Account List screen reappears se 00000003 Pressing No Right Select returns to the list of selections Add options without deleting the account Apply Limit Operation settings when limits are exceeded Use this to specify the action taken when a department exceeds its printing limits 1 Inthe Job Account Set menu press A or V to select Apply Limit 2 Press OK The Apply Limit screen appears Apply Limit lt 0 T titisdiatetu Immediately prohibit printing from this job onwards e Subsequently prohibit printing from the next job onwards 3 Press A or V to select a setting and then press OK The Job MIN cie tuens aH E Account Set menu list reappears Exit 4 127 Operation Panel Unknown ID Job Operation settings for unknown IDs This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown 1 Press Menu 2 Press A or V to select User Job Account 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name OK Note When user login administration is set Login Password When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the User Jo
265. r V to select Print Resolution Press OK The Print Resolution screen appears Press A or V to select the Print Resolution Press OK The Print Resolution is set and the Print Quality menu screen reappears Print Density Selecting the Print Density The print density can be adjusted in five steps from 1 Lighterto 5 Darker The default setting is 3 1 2 Print Density u 1 Lighter 2 3 4 In the Print Quality menu press A or V to select Print Density Press OK The Print Density screen appears Press A or V to select the print density from five steps from 1 Lighter to 5 Darker Press OK The print density is set and the Print Quality menu Screen reappears 4 51 Operation Panel Page Setting Setting pagination You can use the Page Setting menu to set the number of copies the page orientation and other pagination settings The options available in Page Setting are as follows Copies Number of copies 4 52 Reduced Print Reduced print settings 4 52 Orientation Print orientation 4 54 LF Action Linefeed 4 54 CR Action Carriage Return 4 55 Wide A4 Wide A4 pitch 4 55 XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size 4 55 TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size 4 55 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Page Setting 2 Press OK The Page Setting menu screen appears Page Setting Dn Copies Reduced Print O
266. r higher and Change the Altitude Adj settingin Service Setting menu to there are some dropouts or stray dots High 1 If there is still no improvement change the setting to High in the printouts 2 For more information refer to Service Setting for Maintenance on ABC ABC i23 123 Troubleshooting Error Messages The following table lists errors and maintenance messages that you can be dealt with by yourself If Machine failure Call service appears turn off the printer disconnect the power cord and contact your service technician lf Machine failure Call service OrError occurred Turn the power switch off and on is displayed turn off the printer then turn it back on to see if the printer has recovered If the printer has not recovered turn off the printer disconnect the power cord and contact your service representative or authorized service center Some errors cause the alarm to sound To stop the alarm press Cancel Message Corrective Action A machine administrator right is required You can only change the settings selected when logged in as a user with machine administrator privileges Access denied You cannot login The Log in operation failed for the specified number of times so it is no longer possible to attempt to log in Contact a system administrator Access point was not detected It was not possible to connect to the network with th
267. ration Panel Job Account Set Job Account setting Job Accounting is a function that allows the number of pages used by each department to be managed through the use of entered account IDs To specify the Job Accounting settings it is necessary to log in with an administrator s Login User Name and Login Password For details of User Login Administration refer to User Login Set User login setting on page 4 110 Job accounting on this machine offers the following features Support for up to 100 departments Account IDs up to 8 digits long from 1 to 99999999 Collective print management for the same account ID Totaling of the number of pages used for each department Specifiable limits 1 to 9 999 999 on the number of pages used The options available in the Job Account Set menu are as follows Job Accounting Enabling Job Accounting 4 122 AccountingAccess Setting the job accounting access 4 122 Account Local Job Accounting settings 4 123 Apply Limit Operation settings when limits are exceeded 4 127 1 Press Menu 2 Press A or V to select User Job Account 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name Wi Note When user login administration is set Login Password When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the User Job Account menu screen Login is displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an
268. redefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages including Document Box and Settings on the navigation menu The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished case sensitive This section explains how to change the security settings Tho E gt amp ode v Pager Safetyv Tools v amp KYOCERA Admin Login 6 User Name Admin Password eecce Display Jobs Detail Status Show All Display Jobs Log Show All gt Data Security Setings Settings 1 2 Launch your Web browser In the address or location bar enter the machine s IP address or the host name Note Print the status page to check the machine s IP amp N address and the host name For details refer to Status Page Printing a printer s status page on page 4 12 Log in with administrator privileges The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished case sensitive From the Security Settings menu select the setting you want to configure Note The configurable settings within Device Security and amp Network Security can also be configured from the machine s operation panel For detail
269. refer to Status Page Printing a OK printer s status page on page 4 12 4 109 Operation Panel User Job Account User Login Setting Job Account setting It is possible to set User Login Administration and Job Accounting on this machine User Job Account has the following items User Login Set User login setting 4 110 e Job Account Set Job Account setting 4 121 Unknown ID Job Operation settings for unknown IDs 4 128 User Login Set User login setting User Login Administration is a function which makes it possible to specify the users who can use the machine and to manage the users If the login user name and password entered match those already registered then the user is authenticated and can log in to the machine Users are classified into User Administrator or DeviceAdmin depending on their authority The setting of security levels can only be done by DeviceAdmin The authentication for this machine uses a network authentication server The registration of users is done on the server In the local user list for the machine 1 user with administrator authority and 1 user with device administrator authority are registered To change the administrator information refer to Administrator on page 4 117 When the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated it is possible to log in using an ID card First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration
270. res better when printing on small size thick or textured paper In addition you can select the half speed mode to feed thick paper smoothly and avoid the paper jam This mode may result in quieter printing Note Half speed mode applies to all media types except Transparency and Vellum Line Thinning Printer Driver Settings Line thinning reduces the pen width of lines used for barcodes and line drawings Drawing values controlled by an application are not changed Item Description Off default setting Line thinning is not applied Barcodes This setting reduces the pen width value for vertical and horizontal lines It improves the readability of barcodes Fine lines This setting reduces the pen width value for vertical horizontal and diagonal lines All This setting reduces the pen width by a value of 1 for vertical horizontal and diagonal line used in barcodes or line drawings Note Line thinning is available when PCL XL is selected in the PDL Settings dialog box When GDI compatible amp mode is selected in the PDL Settings dialog box Line thinning is not available Correct Fine Line by Device Enable correction of pen width by device This feature is available only on supported models Custom Box Optional Feature Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval You can create or delete a Custom Box and data can be exchanged in va
271. restart message appears restart the computer by following the screen prompts This completes the software uninstallation procedure Note The software can also be uninstalled using the Product amp N Library disk In the Product Library installation screen click Uninstall and follow the on screen instructions to uninstall the software Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh The machine s printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer The following is an explanation for installation in MAC OSX 10 9 Note Installation on MAC OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges When printing from a Macintosh computer set the machine s emulation to KPDL or KPDL Auto For details refer to Emulation Setting the emulation on page 4 45 If connecting by Bonjour enable Bonjour in the machine s network settings For details refer to Bonjour Bonjour setting on page 4 60 In the Authenticate screen enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system 1 Insert the Product Library disk 2 Double click the Kyocera icon Preparation before Use T M R 3 Double click OS X 10 5 or higher iur di _ ooo 4 Double click Kyocera OS X 10 54 La Ea Qa Mini bd ooo gt 5 The printer driver installation program starts up cd KYOCERA Welcome to the Kyocera Macintosh Installer 6 Install the printer driver as directe
272. ric keys and press OK The mailAddress screen reappears Note Up to 128 characters can be entered For details on amp entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 To change the Account ID Note This item is only displayed when Job Account is set 16 Press lor gt to select Account ID Detail etm Account ID 5 5 200000001 Change 17 Pressing Change Right Select The Account ID screen Account ID ui appears 11111111 2822222222 2 33333333 18 Press A or V to select the Account ID and press OK The Account ID screen reappears Note For other accounts select Others ID Card Settings This sets the login method when the optional Card Authentication Kit is used and users are managed using ID cards Note This item is only displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated For details of the Card amp Authentication Kit refer to Card Authentication Kit B Operation Guide for Printer 1 Inthe User Login Set menu press A or V to select ID Card Settings 2 Press OK The ID Card Settings menu screen appears ID Card Settings mMm Key Login The options available in ID Card Settings are as follows Password Login Key Login Setting for key login permission 4 119 Hee Additional Auth Setting for additional authentication 4 120 Key Login Setting for key login permission This setting also permits
273. rientation Exit Copies Number of copies You can set the number of copies of each page to be printed 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select Copies 2 Press OK The Copies screen appears Copies m 1 999 copies 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the number of copies 4 Press OK The setting is stored and the Page Setting menu reappears Reduced Print Reduced print settings This selects the settings for reducing the size of the print data and printing it Reduced Print Set the paper size before the reduction and set the reduction ratio Note With Reduced Print the results may differ from the results of same size printing The character line width SJ may not be constant and lines may appear in the middle of figures images or patterns Also thin lines etc may not be printed Furthermore it may not be possible to read barcodes that have been printed with Reduced Print 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select Reduced Print 4 52 Operation Panel XT RU REN RS Geo oe amp EE Dat p Source Size Target Size Reduction Ratio 2 Press OK The Reduced Print screen appears Reduced Print is displayed as follows Source Size This is the paper size before the reduction This must be the same as the paper size set in the print data Target Size Reduction Ratio This is the paper size after reduction or th
274. rious ways To use a Custom Box an optional SSD must be installed in the printer For more details on Custom Box operation refer to Custom Box on page 5 3 Job Box Optional Feature Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print Stored Job Quick Copy and Proof and Hold which will be discussed later Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user For more details on Job Box operation refer to Job Box on page 5 21 3 6 Printing ThinPrint Activation Optional Feature This printer can select whether or not to communicate using ThinPrint For more details on operation refer to Op Functions Optional application settings on page 4 133 Secure Pull Printing Optional Feature Secure Pull Printing is a printing feature where a user pulls the print job to a printer selected after the job is spooled in a Server To use this feature the following system environments are required 5 The spooler 2 The spooler server server sends the receives the print job print job to the 1 A user sends selected printer the print job to the spooler server 6 The user pulls the print job from the selected printer 3 The user logins to the 4 The Authentication printer or other MFP via Server confirms the an Authentication S
275. rity WSD PRINT On Off Enhanced WSD On Off EnhancedWSD SSL On Off IPP On Off SSL Setting SSL Off On On Off Encryption AES DES 3DES IPP over SSL On Off HTTPS On Off IPSec On Off ThinPrint Off On On Off ThinPrint over SSL On Off LAN Interface Auto 10BASE Half 10BASE Full 100BASE Half 100BASE Full 1000BASE T Note When the network settings have been changed restart the network card of the device This is mandatory to make the settings effective For details refer to Restart Network Restarting the network card on page 4 64 Network Settings This section explains the settings for when DHCP is used or when an IP Address is entered while TCP IPv4 is selected For details of the settings refer to Network Network settings on page 4 57 Also for how to use the Menu Selection System refer to Using the Menu Selection System on page 4 7 Note When entering an IP Address manually check the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway with the J system administrator 1 While the printer displays Ready to print Please wait and Menu n Processing press Menu The mode selection menu is Report disi Sup isplayed Counter Paper Settings Exit 2 Press A or V to select Network 3 Press OK The Network menu screen appears Network lt OK TCP IP Settings Restart Network Exit 2 3 Preparation before Use Checking that TCP IP is On This
276. rs SSL Setting m IPP over SSL HTTPS Exit SSL SSL Server setting Select the SSL server settings The options available in SSL are as follows Off On SSL operation setting 4 101 Encryption Encryption setting 4 101 1 Inthe ssL setting menu press A or V to select SSL 2 Press OK The SSL menu screen appears SSL Dn Encryption Exit Off On SSL operation setting Select whether or not to use the SSL server The default setting is On 1 Inthe ssi menu press A or V to select o On 2 Press OK The o On screen appears Off On Red oK Off 3 Press or V to select whether to use the SSL server 4 Press OK The SSL server setting is set and the SSL menu reappears Encryption Encryption setting Select the encryption method used on the SSL server Note This setting is only displayed when the SSL Setting SSL Server setting on page 4 101 is set to On 1 Inthe ssi menu press A or V to select Encryption 4 101 Operation Panel SSL lt OK Off On Encryption Exit 2 Press OK The Encryption screen appears 3 Press A or V to select the encryption method to be used and then press OK The options available in Encryption are as follows AES SSL Server AES setting AES Advanced Encryption Standard was developed to replace DES as the standard encryption a
277. ry adding more memory or installing SSD and configuring the RAM disk settings Non genuine Toner Press Help This message is displayed if the installed toner container is non genuine The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for damage caused by a non genuine toner We recommend that you only use genuine toner containers When you want to use the toner container currently installed press OK and Cancel simultaneously for 3 seconds or more Paper jammed EERE E EAEE E tt A paper jam has occurred The location of the paper jam is indicated in place of the s For details refer to Clearing Paper Jams on page 8 16 Paper path error Set Cassette Print overrun There is no paper cassette in the feeder or the cassette is not inserted properly After reinserting the corresponding paper cassette you should be able to print When two or more optional feeders are installed and the lowest one is selected the same message will appear if any of the upper paper feeder and the printer cassette is improperly installed The data transferred to the printer was too complex to print on a page Press OK to resume printing 8 12 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action RAM disk error Press OK tit A RAM disk error has occurred Look at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as
278. s Q Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings Q Management Configure the advanced management settings Q Settings t The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings depending on the permissions of the user Accessing Command Center RX r kg ttp 10 180 81 2 t 10 180 877 i A E v Pagey Safetyv Tools v amp KYOCERA 1 2 Launch your Web browser In the address or location bar enter the machine s IP address or the host name Note Print the status page to check the machine s IP 9 address and the host name For details refer to Status Page Printing a printer s status page on page 4 12 Examples https 10 180 81 2 for IP address https DEVICE001 if the host name is DEVICE001 The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well as their current status Note If the screen There is a problem with this website s security certificate is displayed configure the certificate For details on Certificates refer to the Command Center RX User Guide You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate 2 18 Preparation before Use Changing Security Settings 3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen Z Note To fully access the features of the Command Center v RX pages enter the User Name and Password and click Login Entering the p
279. s refer to Operation Panel on page 4 1 For details on settings related to certificates refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Preparation before Use Changing Device Information Change the device information of the machine r o T 10 180 8T th Ej gt C d v Pager Safetyv Tool v KYOCERA Admin Login User Name Admin Password LELLES E Lest Updated G 2014 07 02 02 33 53 KMD87E18 English US English E mail Settings Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send notification of the end of a Job via E mail Launch your Web browser In the address or location bar enter the machine s IP address or the host name i Note Print the status page to check the machine s IP SV address and the host name For details refer to Status Page Printing a printer s status page on page 4 12 Log in with administrator privileges The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below Login User Name Admin Login Password Admin Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished case sensitive From the Device Settings menu select System Enter the device information and then click Submit IMPORTANT After changing the setting restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON To restart the network interface card click Reset in the Management Settings menu and then click Restart Networ
280. s Login User Name is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 5 Press A or V to select the Login Password entry field Login User Name Wi 4000 Login Password Login Operation Panel 6 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Login Password Pas OK ABC Text 7 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK mu m Name The login screen reappears Login Password Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login J Password is 4000 Login For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 8 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the Timer Settingmenu appears showing a list of available options Timer Setting i Auto Panel Reset PanelReset Timer Sleep Level Set Exit Auto Panel Reset Auto panel reset setting The Auto Panel Reset function automatically restores the default settings if the panel is not used for a set time The default setting is On For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset refer to Pane Reset Timer Setting the panel reset timer on page 4 88 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Auto Panel Reset 2 Press OK The Auto Panel Reset screen appears Auto Panel Reset m Off 3 Press or V
281. s Monitor it is necessary to install Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 beforehand e Setup has detected that the following prerequisites have not been met 4B Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 www microsoft com Click Install Finish the installation When Your software is ready to use appears you can use the software To print a test page click the Print a test page checkbox and select the machine Click Finish to exit the wizard If a system restart message appears restart the computer by following the screen prompts This completes the printer driver installation procedure Preparation before Use Uninstalling the Software Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer Note Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges 1 Click Start button on the Windows and then select All Programs Kyocera and Uninstall Kyocera Product Library to display the Uninstall Wizard Note In Windows 8 click Search in charms and enter amp Uninstall Kyocera Product Library in the search box Select Uninstall Kyocera Product Library in the search list 2 Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted Welcome to the Software Remove Wizard Click Uninstall This wizard helps you remove software for your printing system X Please close all your applications before continuing CO KYOCERA 3 ifa system
282. s at 10 pitches This setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select Wide A4 2 Press OK The wide A4 screen appears Wide A4 U o1kOff On 3 Press A or V to select whether Wide A4 mode is enabled 4 Press OK The wide mode setting is set and the Page Setting menu reappears XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size Select on in this setting to enlarge or reduce XPS files to fit the printable area during printing 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select XPS FitTo Page 2 Press OK The xPS FitTo Page screen appears XPS FitTo Page Dn 03 off On 3 Press A or V to select whether XPS FitTo Page mode is enabled 4 Press OK The XPS FitTo Page setting is set and the Page Setting menu reappears TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size Use this setting to select the printing method used when TIFF or JPEG files are printed directly 1 Inthe Page Setting menu press A or V to select TIFF JPEG Size 4 55 Operation Panel TIFF JPEG Size m Paper Size Image Resolution Print Resolution Press OK The TIFF JPEG Size screen appears The options available in TIFF JPEG Size are as follows Paper Size default Images are resized so that they fill the paper size when printed Image Resolution Image files are printed at the resolution specified in the resolution
283. s or press A or V to enter the hours and minutes Press A or V to increase or decrease the figures Use lt and gt to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted 5 Press OK The Menu screen reappears File operations Printing deleting and moving files It is possible to print files stored in a Custom Box to delete them or to move them to a different Custom Box The following operations are possible Box number Box name Select a File 5 13 Select Deselect All Files 5 14 Print a File 5 14 Print a File Changes to the print settings 5 15 Delete a File 5 19 Moving files 5 19 Check File Details 5 20 1 Inthe custom Box list screen press A or V to select a Custom Box n Custom Box Ui 0001 Box 01 50002 Box 02 0003 Box 03 Menu Add 2 Press OK The printer displays a list of files stored in the Custom 30001 Box 01 pag OK Box Data 01 Note If the screen for entering a password is displayed then ui fiData 02 rri amp enter the password using the numeric keys and then press OK Menu JL select Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters Box number Box name Select a File To print delete a file in the Custom Box first select the file to be printed or deleted 1 Press or V to select the file to be printed deleted 2 When Select Right Select is pressed the file is selected A checkmark wil
284. s the safety of DES has declined AES is a block encryption system that uses 128 bit blocks and an SPN structure a typical structure for repeated encryption with three selectable key lengths of 128 192 and 256 bits DES DES Data Encryption Standard is a typical symmetric key cryptographic algorithm that divides data in to 64 bit blocks and then encrypts each block using a 56 bit key IMPORTANT Symmetric key cryptography because it uses the same key for both encryption and decryption uses the same key in both directions when encrypted data is exchanged Accordingly to prevent the key from being divulged key transfer and storage must be very strictly managed 3DES 3DES Triple Data Encryption Standard is a high level of encryption in which DES encryption is repeated threefold A hash symbol 34 appears to the right of the selected encryption method After completing the selection press Complete Right Select The selected encryption method is set and the SSL menu reappears IPP over SSL SSL Server IPP over SSL setting IPP over SSL is an encryption function that uses SSL for communications between users and servers in network printing To use IPP over SSL both server and client must support the protocol The default setting is On IPP over SSL lt OK Off 1 2 Press OK The IPP over SSL screen appears Inthe SSL Setting menu press A or V to select IPP over SSL 3 Press or V to
285. sed RAM disk may also be used t Jobs in excess will cause the earlier ones to be deleted Note Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for the driver settings and print save procedures 5 21 Document Box Procedure for printing using Job Box Follow the work flow below when using Job Box Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job page 5 30 v Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it Quick Copy page 5 22 Proof and Hold page 5 22 Private Print page 5 25 Stored Job page 5 25 Operation panel display 1 Press Document Box Either the Custom Box list screen or the Hu Box id 0 Job Box menu screen is displayed Job Box Setting Note After pressing Document Box it is possible to display SV either the Custom Box list screen or the Job Box menu screen Exit or to set them Refer to Def Screen Box Document Box default screen setting on page 4 77 If the Custom Box list screen is displayed follow the procedure below to display the Job Box menu screen 1 Press Back 2 Press Aor V to select Job Box 3 Press OK The Job Box menu screen appears The options available in Job Box are as follows Quick Copy Using Quick Copy Proof and Hold 5 22 Private Stored Printing a Private Print Stored Job 5 25 Job Box Setting Job Box Configuration 5 28 Quick Copy is displayed if there are any jobs
286. select On 5 Press OK The Address Entry screen appears Address Entry n 6 Enter the address to be notified Note Up to 128 characters can be entered For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 When user login administration is enabled the address of the administrator or machine administrator is entered 4 25 Operation Panel 7 Press OK Register the address and the Function menu reappears Encrypted PDF Entering the PDF password The password of a PDF file can be entered 1 Inthe copies menu or the Paper Source menu press Function Right Select The Function menu appears Function Dn Quiet Mode Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press or V to select Encrypted PDF 3 Press OK The Password entry screen appears Password mm ABC Text 4 Enter the password for the PDF file Note Up to 256 characters can be entered For details on amp entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 5 Press OK to enter the password and the Function menu reappears TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size Use this setting to select the printing method used when TIFF or JPEG files are printed directly 1 Inthe Copies menu or the Paper Source menu press TENE lt i Function Right Select The Function menu appears HLG oae Duplex EcoPrint 2 Press Aor V to select
287. select Personal Info Press OK The Personal Info screen appears Press or V to select Include or Exclude Press OK The setting is stored and the Job Log History menu reappears 4 20 Operation Panel USB Memory USB memory selection This specifies the settings for removing the USB memory and printing USB memory content The USB Memory menu automatically appears when you install the USB memory IMPORTANT This message is only displayed when the USB host block and USB Storage block are set to Unblock For more information please refer to I F Block Set External interface block setting on page 4 104 The options available in the USB Memory menu are as follows Print File Printing and checking the files in the USB memory 4 21 Display of File List 4 21 Print File Printing the selected file 4 22 Print Function Settings 4 23 Quiet Mode Selecting the Quiet Mode 4 23 Duplex Setting the duplex printing 4 23 EcoPrint Selecting the EcoPrint mode 4 24 File Name Entry Entering a file name 4 24 JobFinish Notice Setting for notification when jobs are finished 4 25 Encrypted PDF Entering the PDF password 4 26 TIFF JPEG Size Adjusting the TIFF JPEG file print out size 4 26 XPS FitTo Page Adjusting the XPS file print out size 4 27 Detail Shows the details of the selected file 4 27 Remove Memory Removing the USB memory 4 28 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select
288. select whether IPP over SSL is enabled 4 Press OK The IPP over SSL setting is set and the SSL Setting menu reappears 4 102 Operation Panel HTTPS SSL Server HTTPS setting HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is a protocol that adds SSL data encryption message authentication and a digital signature function to the HTTP protocol used for data transfer between WWW servers and clients S HTTP is a similar protocol but HTTPS differs in that it uses SSL The default setting is On 1 Inthe ssL setting menu press A or V to select HTTPS 2 Press OK The HTTPS screen appears HTTPS Sard OK Off 3 Press A or V to select whether HTTPS is enabled 4 Press OK The HTTPS setting is set and the SSL Setting menu reappears IPSec IPSec setting IPSec IP Security Protocol is a security protocol adopted as the standard by the IETF for authentication and encryption in the third network layer IP layer It can be used with both IPv4 and IPv6 Note IPv4 uses 32 bit IP addresses and IPv6 uses 128 bit IP addresses The default setting is of f 1 Inthe Network Security menu press A or V to select IPSec 2 Press OK The IPSec screen appears IPSec Sard OK 01 Off On 3 Press A or V to select whether IPSec is enabled 4 Press OK The IPSec setting is set and the Network Security menu reappears ThinPrint Thin Print setting Select whether or not to communicate using ThinPr
289. ser Name Ui User 01 Login Password Menu Login 4 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed A Login Password Ui ABC Text 5 Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK Login User Name m The login screen reappears User 01 Login Password Note For details on entering characters refer to Character amp N Entry Method on page A 2 Menu Login 6 Check that the correct login user name and password have been entered then press Login Right Select Zl Note When Job Accounting is set it is possible to press Menu Left Select then select Counter on the menu displayed and press OK to see the number of pages printed 4 116 Operation Panel Logout Auto Logout When the operations are finished press Logout The login screen reappears Logout is automatically executed in the following cases 2 ABC 3 DEF 5 KL 6mno 8 tuv 9 wxvz When the power supply is off When the machine enters the sleep mode after the setting time of Auto Sleep has passed When the power of the machine turns off after the setting time of auto power off has passed When the settings are restored to the default after the setting time of Auto Panel Reset has passed Administrator In the local user list for the machine 1 user wi
290. side the rear of the printer Refer to Hear Unit on page 8 22 4 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container back into the machine 5 Close the front cover and top cover The printer warms up and resumes printing 8 21 Troubleshooting Rear Unit Paper is jammed in the rear cover Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below 1 If paper is not completely ejected into the top tray open the rear cover IMPORTANT If the optional Faceup Output Tray is installed remove it before opening the rear cover 2 Open the fuser cover and remove the jammed paper by pulling it out Note If you cannot find a paper jam try checking inside the amp rear of the printer CAUTION The fuser unit inside the printer is hot Do not touch it with your hands as it may result in burn injury Remove jammed paper carefully 8 22 Troubleshooting Close the rear cover 3 4 Open and close the top cover to clear the error 8 23 Troubleshooting 8 24 Appendix This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Character Entro MelliQil iai iq ep bici tau re ee ee ene Pe eer reper EREE A 2 b cle RP Ree Raia A 5 Expansi n Memory Modules 2iiam inis ix xi dd da RE RuER E00 E LE RR ERE EE ERU I AR LE KIERR I I A AREE EN H KI DL LAM RIIE A 6 General Descriptio
291. sing A or V Use lt and gt to move the position being entered which is shown highlighted 4 Press OK The IP address is stored and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears Subnet Mask Subnet mask setting The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address Note When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Of f 1 IntheriPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select Subnet Mask 2 Press OK The Subnet Mask screen appears Subnet Mask Ui EB gt v o 4 59 Operation Panel 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the subnet mask You can set any value between 000 and 255 Increase or reduce the figures by pressing A or V Use lt a
292. sist of cotton or other fibers Paper Sizes Cassettes and the MP tray are available for the paper sizes listed in the table below For details including the paper sizes for the paper feeder Optional paper feeder PF 4100 refer to Setting the standard paper size on page 4 32 The dimensional tolerances are 0 7 mm 0 0276 inches for the length and width The angle at the corners must be 90 0 2 Yes Can be stored No Cannot be stored Paper Size Size Cassette Cassette PF 4100 MP Tray Envelope 10 4 13 x 9 5 inches No No Yes Envelope 9 3 88 x 8 88 inches No No Yes Envelope 6 3 63 x 6 5 inches No No Yes Envelope Monarch 3 88 x 7 5 inches No No Yes Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm No No Yes Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm No No Yes Envelope C4 229 x 324 mm No No Yes A3 297 x 420 mm Yes Yes Yes A4 R 210 x 297 mm Yes Yes Yes A4 Yes Yes Yes A5 R 148 x 210 mm Yes Yes Yes A5 Yes No No A6 R 105 x 148 mm Yes No Yes B4 257 x 364 mm Yes Yes Yes B5 R 182 x 257 mm Yes Yes Yes B5 Yes No No B6 R 128 x 182 mm Yes No Yes Folio 210 x 330 mm Yes Yes Yes 216 x 340 mm 216 x 340 mm Yes Yes Yes Ledger 11 x 17 inches Yes Yes Yes Appendix Paper Size Size Cassette Cassette PF 4100 MP Tray Letter R 8 5 x 11 inches Yes Yes Yes Letter Yes Yes Yes Legal 8 5 x 14 inches Yes Yes Yes Statement 5 5 x 8 5 inches Yes Yes Yes E
293. sk Note The RAM disk is an allocated part of the printer s memory IMPORTANT The RAM disk can not be used when an optional SSD is installed The RAM disk stores data only temporarily When the printer is reset or turned off the stored data will be erased The RAM disk allows some Job Box functions to be used The RAM disk is allocated from the printer memory available to users If the size of the RAM disk is set too large the printing speed may decrease or the memory may become insufficient 4 82 Operation Panel The options available in RAM Disk Setting are as follows RAM Disk Mode Setting the RAM disk 4 83 RAM Disk Size RAM disk size setting 4 83 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select RAM Disk Setting 2 Press OK The RAM Disk Setting menu screen appears RAM Disk Setting m RAM Disk Mode RAM Disk Size Exit RAM Disk Mode Setting the RAM disk Selecting On in this setting enables the RAM disk 1 Inthe ram Disk Setting menu press A or V to select RAM Disk Mode 2 Press OK The RAM Disk Mode screen appears RAM Disk Mode lt OK Off 3 Press A or V to select whether the RAM disk is enabled 4 Press OK The RAM disk setting is set and the RAM Disk Setting menu reappears RAM Disk Size RAM disk size setting Use this procedure to set the amount of memory used for the RAM disk 1 Inthe ram Disk Setting menu press A or V to select RAM Dis
294. smatch Detection settings for paper size type errors when the paper source is fixed 4 86 MP Tray Empty Warning when the MP tray is empty 4 86 1 Inthe Device Common menu press A or V to select Error Handling 2 Press OK The Error Handling menu screen appears Error Handling lt 0 DuplexPaperError Paper Mismatch MP Tray Empty Exit 4 85 Operation Panel DuplexPaperError Duplex printing error detection setting If the error detection setting for duplex printing has been turned Display Error and you attempt to print onto a paper size and paper type that cannot be used for duplex printing the Duplex disabled error message will be displayed and printing will stop 1 sided To print onto one side of the paper Display To print onto one side of the paper only when this message is displayed press OK Error Press Cancel to cancel the printing itself 1 Inthe Error Handling menu press A or V to select DuplexPaperError 2 Press OK The DuplexPaperError screen appears T DuplexPaperError lt gt 01 1 sided Display Error 3 Press A or V to select the setting for handling duplex paper errors 4 Press OK The handling of duplex paper errors is set and the Error Handling menu screen reappears Paper Mismatch Detection settings for paper size type errors when the paper source is fixed Select Continue in this setting
295. smitted print job or the specified account is not registered the incorrect account is set To return the printer to the print ready status press OK For more information refer to Job Account Set Job Account setting on page 4 121 Incorrect ID The user ID entered for a private job is not correct Check the user ID that you specified on the printer driver 8 9 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Incorrect login user name or password The NTLM server rejected the authentication Enter the correct Login User Name or Password Incorrect login user name or password Job is canceled Enter the correct Login User Name or Login Password Incorrect password Enter the correct password Job Accounting Press OK restriction exceeded This message is displayed when the Job Accounting function is enabled and an attempt has been made to exceed the print limit set for each account To return the printer to the print ready status press OK For more information refer to Job Account Set Job Account setting on page 4 121 Job not stored Press OK Printing using the Custom Box and Job Box function failed because there was insufficient space available on the SSD or RAM disk or because the RAM disk was disabled when demounting the SSD To print an error report and return the printer to the print rea
296. ssword is 000000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 4 Press OK If the Security Password entered is correct the SSD Initializ menu screen appears If the Security Password entered was not correct Incorrect password is displayed and the SecurityPassword screen reappears Enter the correct EE Security Password Exit SSD Initializ m Security Passwd Initialization 4 107 Operation Panel Security Passwd Change the Security Password Change the Security Password New Password U i 4 ABC Text Confirm Password Mm i 4 ABC Text Initialization Initialize on optional SSD Inthe SSD Initializ menu press A or V to select Security Passwd Press OK The New Password entry screen appears Enter the new Security Password using the numeric keys Note The Security Password must be between 6 and 16 SV characters For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press OK The Confirm Password entry screen appears To confirm re enter the security password to be registered Enter the new Security Password using the numeric keys Press OK If the Security Password entered matches then the password is changed to the new password and the SSD Initializ menu reappears Ifthe password does not match Incorrect passwordis displayed and the New Password entry screen reap
297. status covers 6 pages in all Press to view to the next page or lt to return to the previous page Pressing OK returns you to the Job Status menu 6 3 Status Menu 0006 Detail Job Name ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail Un 1 6 display Detail ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTU VWXYZabcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz1234567890 B OK name display Job Log You can use the Job Log to check the history of jobs that have already finished printing If the entire name shown as the Job Name will not fit on one line pressing Detail Right Select changes to a 3 line name Pressing OK during 3 line name display returns you to single line As well as jobs printed from PCs this log shows the outcomes for jobs printed directly from USB memory and reports such as status pages It is possible to check the log of the 100 most recent jobs The information available in the Job Log is listed below Results Displayed Item Content Display Icon Description Job Name Job name Job name Job name Result Job status OK OK Completed normally Error A Error occurred Cancel Job canceled Job Type Job type Printer D Printed from a PC Report E Report USB band Printed from USB memory Box c Printed from Job Box Accepted Time Job reception time Day Month Year Hour Minutet Month Day Year Hour Minutet Year Month Day Hour Minutet User Name Printed Pages
298. supports communications speeds up to 2 Mbps Use a parallel printer cable when this option is used Installing Parallel Interface Kit 1 Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord 2 Open the rear cover and remove the interface cover and power cord connector cover 3 Unscrew five screws at the back of the main controller board A 11 Appendix 4 Pull out the main controller board gently 5 Unscrew two screws and remove the plate 6 Remove the main controller board rail 7 Attach the plate included with the option and fix it with 2 screws 8 Attach the Parallel Interface Kit to the plate xs Sh Appendix O9 Fixit with 2 screws 10 Connect the connector of the Parallel Interface Kit to the connector on the main controller board 11 After you finish installing the option reinstall the main controller board and fasten it with screws 12 Replace the cover and close the rear cover A 13 Appendix USB Memory PT 4100 Faceup Output Tray USB memory is a type of simple highly portable flash memory that plugs into the USB memory slot Files stored in USB memory can be printed by plugging the USB memory into the printer and then specifying the desired file names from the operation panel The operation panel displays the names of PDF TIFF JPEG and XPS files Up to 1 000 files can be printed from USB memory Files with names consisting of up to 255 single byte alphanumeric
299. sword using the numeric keys and then press OK Refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 for details on entering characters Check File Details Details for the file th at is selected with the cursor will appear Menu za 1 Inthe file list screen select the file and press Menu Left Select Search Name Box Detail Edit File Detail 2 Press A or V to select File Detail 3 Press OK Details for the file that is selected with the cursor Detail mn appears File Name 17 5 l ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST The details for the file cover 5 pages in all Press gt to view to the next page or lt to return to the previous page Detail i In the File Name screen if the file name is abbreviated because it Bebe m cannot be displayed on one line press Detail Right Select to ABCDREEGHIJEEMNOPORS TU change the display to three lines VWXYZ txt 5 20 Document Box Job Box IMPORTANT To use the Job Box an optional SSD must be installed in the printer The RAM disk may also be used in the Proof and Hold and Private Print modes Job Boxis a print function that makes the Job Retention function possible The settings are specified from the printer driver Refer to Computer Settings Printer Driver on page 5 30 or the Printer Driver User Guide Note When using the RAM disk to use Job Box set the RAM disk mode to On When using the SSD to use Job
300. t Mode Selecting the Quiet Mode Set the Quiet Mode Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable Note The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode 1 Inthe Quiet Mode menu screen press A or V to select Quiet Mode 2 Press OK The Quiet Mode menu appears Quiet Mode m On 3 Press A or V to select of or On 4 Press OK The Quiet Mode is set and the Quiet Mode menu screen reappears 4 130 Operation Panel Each Job Permission for settings for each jobs It is possible to set the use of Quiet Mode for each job Set whether or not to permit the setting for each job 1 Inthe Quiet Mode menu screen press A or V to select Each Job 2 Press OK The Each Job menu appears Each Job Pad OK Prohibit 3 Press A or V to select Permit or Prohibit 4 Press OK The selected mode is set and the Quiet Mode menu screen reappears Restart Restart Printer The procedure described below resets the printer s temporary conditions such as the current page orientation font etc set by commands to their default values Downloaded fonts and macros are deleted from the printer s memory 1 Inthe Adjust Maint menu screen press A or V to select Restart 2 Press OK A confirmation screen appears Restart Are you sure Press Yes Left Select The printer is restarted Pressing No Right Select returns to the Adjust Maint
301. t to set the paper weight Press OK A menu for the selected media is displayed Press A or V to select Paper Weight Press OK The Paper Weight screen appears listing the paper weights that can used with the printer Press A or V to select the desired paper weight Press OK The paper weight is set and the Media Type Set Screen reappears This setting specifies the paper weight of the selected custom paper whether duplex printing is permitted and the registration of the name to be displayed Use the procedure below to set the custom paper weight Media Type Set Mm Plain Transparency Preprinted Exit CUSTOM 1 OK Paper Weight Duplex Name Entr y Exit 1 2 Inthe Paper Settings menu press A or V toselect Media Type Set Press OK The Media Type Set screen appears listing the media types that can used with the printer Press A or V to select the custom paper CUSTOM 1 to 8 for which you want to set the paper weight Press OK A menu for the selected media is displayed Press A or V to select Paper Weight 4 38 Operation Panel 6 Press OK The Paper Weight screen appears listing the paper Paper Weight vo weights that can used with the printer Heavy 1 Normal 3 06 Normal 2 Exit 7 Press A or V to select the desired paper weight 8 Press OK The paper weight is set and the custom paper screen reappears
302. talled in the printer received data can be rasterized and stored on this SSD This enables high speed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function Also you can use the Document Box functions For details refer to Document Box on page 5 1 Installing SSD 1 Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord 2 Open the rear cover and remove the interface cover 3 Unscrew two screws and remove the cover 4 Insert straight into the Option Interface Slot 5 Fix it with the 2 screws Appendix 6 Replace the cover and close the rear cover Network Interface Kit IB 50 The Network Interface Kit is a high speed interface for communications speeds of 1 gigabit per second In addition to the TCP IP and NetBEUI supported by the machine s standard network interface it also supports IPX SPX and Apple Talk so network printing becomes possible in various environments including Windows Macintosh UNIX and Netware The installation method is the same as for SSD Refer to SSD HD 6 HD 7 on page A 10 Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 This is a Wireless Network Interface Kit which supports the wireless network specifications IEEE802 11n Max 300 Mbps and 11 g b With the utilities supplied settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols The installation method is the same as for SSD Refer to SSD HD 6 HD 7 on page A 10 Parallel Interface Kit IB 32 The parallel interface kit
303. ter the new password using the numeric keys Note Up to 16 characters can be entered For details on SV entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Press OK The Confirm Password entry screen appears To confirm re enter the password to be registered Enter the password using the numeric keys Press OK If the password is correct the setting is changed to the new password and the Detail menu screen reappears If the password is not correct the display shows Incorrect password and returns to the New Password screen so enter again from the new password In the Detail menu screen press lt or gt to select Box Number Document Box 2 Press Edit Right Select The Box Name Entry screen appears Box Number Entry m 0001 1000 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to enter the Box Number k Note Enter the Box Number as a four digit number from 0001 1000 If the display shows This box number is already registered this Box Number is already in use Register a different Box Number 4 Press OK The Detail menu screen reappears Usage Restrict Setting for maximum possible capacity usage It is possible to restrict the capacity of Boxes To limit the usage capacity enter the maximum value MB using the numeric keys The limit value will vary depending on the number of user Boxes that are created but it is possible to enter the maximum between 1 an
304. th administrator authority and 1 user with device administrator authority are registered Each user s properties are Machine Administrator Administrator User Name DeviceAdmin User Name Admin Login User Name 4000 Login User Name Admin Login Password 4000 Login Password Admin Access Level Machine Administrator Access Level Administrator Changing the administrator information It is possible to change the administrator information Use the procedure below to change the details registered Note Log in as DeviceAdmin to change the administrator information When logged in as Admin it is only possible amp to check the administrator information 1 Inthe User Login Set menu press A or V to select Local User List 2 Press OK The Local User List screen appears 3 Press A or V to select the administrator to change Local User List mMm amp DeviceAdmin Detail KES oK User Name 5 Admin To change the Login User Name 4 117 4 Press OK The detailed information for the user is displayed Operation Panel Detail Login User Name 2 5 Admin Edit m Login User Name admini ABC Text To change the Login Password Detail Login Password 3 5 asacsonseca Edit A New Password lt 0 ABC Text Confirm Password A lt gt v ABC Text
305. that were saved to the SSD in Quick Copy mode Quick Copy is also displayed if there are any jobs that were saved to SSD or RAM disk in Proof and Hold mode Private Storedis only displayed if there are any jobs that were saved to the SSD or RAM disk Quick Copy Using Quick Copy Proof and Hold Quick Copy mode enables you to print the requested number of copies of a job simultaneously storing the job on the SSD When additional copies are required you can reprint the required number of copies from the printer operation panel The default number of print jobs that can be stored on the SSD is 32 This value can be increased to up to 300 For details refer to Job Box Setting Job Box Configuration on page 5 28 When the number of jobs reaches the limit the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one When you print multiple copies Proof and Hold mode first prints one copy so that you can proof it before continuing to print the remaining copies Since you can proof the printouts before printing the remaining copies wastage of paper can be reduced The printer prints one copy and at the same time saves the print job on the SSD or RAM disk You can also change the number of copies when resuming printing from the operation panel When the printer is turned off all stored jobs will be deleted Note When a print job is stored in a job Box for proof and hold the power consumption is more than that of the sleep mode Refer to the Printer Driv
306. the command The fil already exists nam You cannot copy Copying is not possible because data with the same file name exists at the destination Delete the data with the same file name at the destination before copying The user name is not registered The login user name entered is not registered Check the login user name This account ID is already registered The account ID set has already been registered Register a different account ID This login user name already registered The changed login user name has already been registered Set a different login user name Toner is running out The toner has run low Ensure that a new toner container is available without delay For details refer to Toner Container Replacement on page 7 2 Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action Top tray is full of paper Remove the paper The top tray has become full 500 pages A4 or 450 pages A3 You must remove all printed pages from the top tray When the printer detects that the top tray is empty again the printer will continues printing into the top tray Unknown toner installed PC This message is displayed if the installed toner container s regional specification does not match the machine s Install the specified toner container USB memory error Press OK tit An error has occ
307. the third network layer IP layer It can be used with both IPv4 and IPv6 Note IPv4 uses 32 bit IP addresses and IPv6 uses 128 bit IP addresses 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select IPSec 4 73 Operation Panel 2 Press OK The IPSec screen appears IPSec m 03 off On 3 Press A or V to select whether IPSec is enabled 4 Press OK The IPSec setting is set and the Basic menu reappears LAN Interface LAN Interface setting Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto Note LAN Interface is only displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit IB 50 is installed 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select LAN Interface 2 Press OK The LAN Interface screen appears LAN Interface Dn The available LAN Interface are as follows 10BASE Half Auto 03 LOBASE Full ORASE EU 10BASE Half 10BASE Full 100BASE Half 100BASE Full 1000BASE T 3 Press A or V to select the desired LAN Interface 4 Press OK The LAN Interface is set and the Basic menu reappears MACAddressFilter MAC address filtering setting This sets whether or not to enable MAC address filtering Note The detailed settings for MAC address filtering are selected using the optional Network Interface Kit utility J software 1 Inthe Basic menu press A or V to select MACAddressFilter 2 Press OK The MACAddressFilter screen appears
308. tionStatus screen appears Press lt or gt The NetwkName SSID is displayed If the entire name shown as the NetwkName SSID will not fit on one line pressing Detail Right Select changes to a 3 line name display 4 66 Operation Panel Quick Setup Quick setup for the wireless network When connecting to an access point which supports the automatic wireless network setup you can select the connection settings using Quick Setup 1 Inthe Wireless Network menu press A or V to select Quick Setup 2 Press OK The Quick Setup menu screen appears Quick Setup ni f AvailableNetwork The following operations are possible Push Button AvailableNetwork Display the access points PIN Device Push Button Connect using Push Button Exit J PIN Device Connect using a PIN code for the Wireless Network Interface Kit PIN Terminal Connect using a PIN code for the access point AvailableNetwork Display the access points Displays the access points which can be connected to 1 Inthe Quick Setup menu press A or V to AvailableNetwork 2 Press OK The availableNetwork screen appears AvailableNetwork gt M Fa AccessPoint 001 Note If you cannot find the desired access point press 7 AccessPoint 002 SJ Reload Right Select to update the information FT AccessPoint 003 Reload 3 Press or V to select the access point to connect to 4 Press OK The
309. tive 1 Inthe Job Box menu press A or V to select Job Box Setting 2 Press OK The Job Box Setting screen appears Job Box Setting M Quick Copy Jobs JobRet Deletion Storage Media Exit 3 Press A or V to select Storage Media and press OK The Storage Media screen appears 4 Press or V to select the desired storage media The list shows the Storage Media vm following media 03 ssD SD Card SSD SD Card 5 Press OK The setting is stored and the Job Box Setting menu reappears 5 29 Document Box Computer Settings Printer Driver Use the procedure below to store data in a Custom Box or a Job Box Document Box Custom Box 1 From the application menu select Print The Print dialog box displays 2 Click the drop down list of printer names All the printers installed in Windows are listed Click the name of the machine 3 Click Properties The Properties dialog box displays 4 Click the Job tab and select the Job storage e MPS check box to set the function Um eo o zam EAER Job name CME Application defined cl Basic V Don t use application name EL Copies collate d Gii Quick copy Proof and hold BE Pinte print T Imaging Use job name dateandt v ME Publishing Method for setting the printer driver 1 Select Custom box 2 Click Settings 3 Select a Custom Box Settings option Select Use spe
310. to configure a variety of print related settings For more information refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the Product Library disk a Quick Print rientation Collate Duplex Pages per sheet EcoPrint h Basic L E zi DL E HE Pubiishing Advanced CED Sweas J Promes Pint preview KYOCERA ert J No Description 1 Quick Print Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions Each time you click an icon it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings ge E Quick Print Orientation Collate Duplex Pages per sheet EcoPrint 2m Cm n Fi Ex Layout muuub smb esap mos smp Basic This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used You can use it to configure the paper size media type destination and duplex Layout This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts including booklet printing combine mode poster printing and scaling Imaging This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality and grayscale adjustment of the print results Publishing This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film Job This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later Since sav
311. to select whether Auto Panel Reset is enabled 4 Press OK The Auto Panel Reset setting is set and the Timer Setting menu reappears PanelReset Timer Setting the panel reset timer When Auto Panel Reset is set to On this sets the time until the panel is automatically reset after the user stops using the panel The default setting is 90 seconds 1 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select PanelReset Timer 2 Press OK The PanelReset Timer screen appears PanelReset Timer M 5 495 lt lt 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the panel reset time 4 Press OK The panel reset time setting is stored and the Timer Setting menu reappears 4 88 Operation Panel Sleep Level Set Sleep level setting For Europe This sets whether or not the machine enters sleep mode for each function Note Sleep Level Set menu is not displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit IB 50 or Wireless SJ Network Interface Kit IB 51 has been installed Sleep Level Set Mm Status Status m Network USB Cable Card Reader Network Dn Off 1 2 Inthe Timer Setting menu press A or V to select Sleep Level Set Press OK The Sleep Level Set menu screen appears Press A or V to select Status Press OK The Status menu screen appears Next set whether or not to use Energy Saver mode for each function Item
312. ts such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission USB Universal Serial Bus An interface standard for low to middle speed serial interfaces This printer supports Hi Speed USB The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps and the maximum cable length is 5 meters 16 feet Glossary 4 Index A Administrator llis 4 117 Alternative Emulation 2 200 0055 4 46 Appendix 25 tushaie hohe aces aye UNRDE INE ence A 1 AppleTalk coil Ic Rm Glossary 1 Auto Cassette Change 0c eee ee eee 4 42 Auto IP c cea a ie cei eee ORE Glossary 1 B Bonjour 00 cee eee Glossary 1 B zzet find Grbdd debated debketode bias a 4 80 C Canceling a Printing Job 00 3 2 4 4 Card Authentication Kit 0 A 15 Cassette 1 to 5 Settings Cassettes nescias chee eee eX EUR ios S 4 32 Paper weight llllllllllllllsesn 4 37 Cassette e ciscus diede c de eue IIR ERE 1 2 Character Entry Method 0000 00 A 2 Cleaning Printet ce och e oP eee eae r BER REY RS ER 7 9 Clearing paper jams Duplex unit 212i ud per exe tr ches 8 19 Inside the printer llli 8 20 MP tray ursi d P paru ER toed edere Ra 8 18 Paper cassette 2 usus eese 8 18 Paperfeeder 4225243 rbobhacaeiies ened 8 18 Rear Unit ulcer osa qoe nk 8 22 Code Set i229 6lsgguebe RES CP Ee irn eed 4 49 Colored Paper ecic cocs d n RR RR E
313. tte installed in the printer that matches the paper size and paper type of the print job Set paper in the MP tray Press OK to resume printing Note that feeding the paper having a paper size which does not match the current paper size from the MP tray can cause paper jam If you want to print from a different paper source press A1t Left Select to display Alternative and you can change the source for paper feeding You can abandon printing by pressing Cancel Loading paper The selected cassette is being prepared Low security This message is displayed when Low was selected in Security Level Troubleshooting Message Corrective Action represents a mechanical error 4270 1 2 Call for service The printer Machine failure does not operate when this message is displayed The total number of pages Call service HEHE 0123456 printed is also indicated e g 0123456 full cannot be Memory is Print job processed completely The total amount of data received by the printer exceeds the printer s internal memory Try adding more memory Press OK to resume printing You can abandon printing by pressing Cancel If Auto Error Clear is set to On printing will be automatically resumed after a preset period of time No multi copies Press OK Multi copies cannot be printed because RAM disk is disabled or the SSD is not installed T
314. tting is On switch it to off on the operation panel Make sure the paper type setting is correct the paper being used Refresh the drum to restore the printing quality For more information refer to Service Setting for Maintenance on page 4 132 Then adjust the print density For more information refer to Print Density Selecting the Print Density on page 4 51 If the damp paper is loaded into the cassette or MP tray replace the paper with a newer dryer paper If the problem is not solved using the corrective action above call for Service Gray background ABC 123 Refresh the drum to restore the printing quality For more information refer to Service Setting for Maintenance on page 4 132 Then adjust the print density For more information refer to Print Density Selecting the Print Density on page 4 51 If the problem is not solved using the corrective action above call for Service 8 3 Troubleshooting Printed Results Corrective Action Dirt on the top edge or back of the If the problem is not solved even after printing several pages clean paper the registration roller For more information refer to Cleaning the Printer on page 7 9 If the problem is not solved after cleaning call for service ABC 123 Printing incomplete or out of position Check that the application software is correctly operated Refer to Tips on page 8 2 ABC 192 The altitude is 1500 m o
315. tting menu press A or V to select Auto IP 2 Press OK The Auto IP screen appears Auto IP lt 0 Off 4 58 Operation Panel 3 Press or V to select whether Auto IP is enabled 4 Press OK The Auto IP setting is set and the IPv4 Setting menu reappears IP Address IP address setting An IP address is the address of a network device such as a computer and is included in IP packets as needed for the sending and receiving of Internet data IP packets IP addresses can be either destination addresses or source addresses Specifically an IP address is a bit string consisting of a host address or host section that identifies a computer host connected to the Internet and a network address or network section that identifies the network to which that computer belongs or more specifically the computer s network interface Bit strings IP addresses that are unique throughout the entire Internet system are allocated to each computer or interface The IP addresses currently used on the Internet IPv4 have a fixed length of 32 bits Note When you enter the IP address be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off 1 Inthe rPv4 Setting menu press A or V to select IP Address 2 Press OK The IP Address screen appears IP Address U EB gt gt v o 3 Use the numeric keys or press A or V to set the IP address You can set any value between 000 and 255 Increase or reduce the figures by pres
316. ttings follow the steps described below 1 Inthe Print Settings menu press A or V to select Paper Feed Mode 2 Press OK The Paper Feed Mode screen appears showing the available paper feed options Paper Feed Mode Mm Fixed 3 Press A or V to select the desired paper feed mode 4 Press OK The paper feed mode is set and the Print Settings menu reappears Duplex Setting the duplex printing Using the duplexer you can automatically print on both sides of the paper Duplex printing is available for the following paper media types Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Note Duplex printing can be also performed from the MP tray If the paper to be fed from the MP tray does not 9 J match the paper size and paper type of the current paper feed source cassette a paper jam may occur When Custon is specified duplex printing can be set For details refer to Custom Paper Settings on page 4 38 4 43 Operation Panel Binding Modes Binding refers to the manner in which printed pages of paper are joined together by gluing stitching etc in book form The two possible types of binding are Bind Long Edge in which pages are joined together along their long edge and Bind Short Edge in which they are joined together along their short edge In selecting a binding type you must also consider the orientation of the printed page You can
317. ttings the administrator s Login User Name and Login Password must be entered For details of the administrator settings refer to Administrator on page 4 117 The options available in Security are as follows Network Security Network security setting 4 99 I F Block Set External interface block setting 4 104 Security Level 4 106 Data Security Data Security setting 4 107 1 Press Menu 2 Press or V to select Security 3 Press OK The Login screen appears Login User Name i Note When user login administration is set Login Password When logged in as an administrator the log in screen is not displayed and the Security menu screen is Login displayed The setting is not possible when logged in as anyone other than an administrator Log in again as an administrator Login User Name mMm 4 With the Login User Name entry field selected press OK The Login User Name entry screen is displayed ABC Text 5 Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK The log in screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login User N Name is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 6 Press or V to selectthe Login Password entry field Login User Name OK 4000 Login Password Login z 7 Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Login
318. u Menu Counter P OK Report Paper Settings Exit Detail etm File Name 1 4 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORST Detail Setting a Menu Media Type 02 Preprinted Bond A lt gt Y Canceling Menu Selection If lt gt appears in the top right of the screen you can use the A and V to scroll up and down through the menu options one line at a time and the lt and gt to move between menu options one page at a time f gt appears in the top right of the screen you can use the lt and gt to switch between pages To return to the menu one level up press Back Select the desired menu and press OK You can now select options in the menu Press A V lt or gt to select or enter the desired setting and then press OK to confirm your selection If you are choosing from a list of settings an asterisk is displayed to the left of the currently selected setting If you press Menu when a menu is selected the message display returns to Ready to print Operation Panel Setting a Mode Selection Menu This section explains the setting procedures used for each menu item in the mode selection menu Menu Report Counter a OK Paper Settings Exit 1 While the printer displays Ready to print Please wait and Processing press Menu The mode selection menu is displayed Each time you press A or V the se
319. ue is 100 the toner container is full The closer to 0 the smaller the amount of remaining toner Font List Printing a list of the printer s fonts To help you decide in selecting a font you can printout lists of the internal fonts or the optional fonts 1 Inthe Report Print menu press A or V to select Font List 2 Press OK A confirmation message is displayed Note When Job Accounting is set but user login is not set amp the screen for entering Job Accounting information is displayed Enter the Account ID and press OK 3 Press Yes Left Select The message Accepted appears and Print the printer prints the font list Are you sure Font List Pressing No Right Select returns to the Report Print menu without printing the font list Yes No Font List Sample Font Name Scalable Bitmap Password Selection FSET Font ID SWE LEELLE PETTITT anal LLLTTETELEELLT LLLI Font Name Scalable Bitmap Password Selection FSET Font ID LLLI TUTTE PTTL ETT PTET TII LLLI TELL PTET LETT PTET ELDI LLLI 4 14 Operation Panel RAM File List Printing a list of the files on the RAM disk This allows you to print a list of the files on the RAM disk IMPORTANT This is displayed when RAM Disk Mode is set to on Print Yes Are you sure RAM File List E No In the Report Print menu press A or V to select RA
320. ult Paper Feeder PF 4100 Option Item Description The maximum number of paper cassettes 4 Paper size A3 A4 R A4 A5 R B4 B5 R Folio 216 x 340 mm Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il ISO B5 8K 16K and Custom Paper type Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Prepunched High Quality and CUSTOM 1 to 8 Paper capacity 500 sheets 80 g m Dimensions W x D x H 469 x 410 x 121 mm 18 7 16 x 16 1 8 x 4 3 4 Weight 6 0 kg 13 2 Ibs SSD HD 6 HD 7 Option Item Capacity Description HD 6 HD 7 32 GB 128 GB Power supply From the machine A 28 Appendix Network Interface Kit IB 50 Option Item Description CPU SoC 88F6180 RAM 64 MBytes Flash ROM 16 MBytes Connectors 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Printer interface eKUIO 5 0V Operating system Windows XP 32bit 64bit Vista 32bit G4bit 7 32bit 6G4bit Server 2003 32bit 64bit Server 2008 32bit 64bit NetWare 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x MacOS 9 x Mac OS X PowerPC Ver 10 3 x Ver 10 5 5 Intel Ver 10 4 4 Ver 10 7 x UNIX Network protocols IPv6 IPv4 Apple Bonjour Compatible DHCPv6 DNSv6 FTP FTPS HTTP HTTPS ICMPv6 IKEv1 IPP IPPS Kerberos LDAP LPD POP3 RawPort SLP SMTP SNMP SNMPv1 v2c v3 SNTP ThinPrint Apple Bonjour Compatible BOOTP DHCP DNS FTP FTPS HTTP
321. unlight or damp Note When using coated paper be aware that the sheets will stick together in a very humid environment Paper Grain When paper is manufactured it is cut into sheets with the grain running parallel to the length long grain or parallel to the width short grain Short grain paper can cause feeding problems in the machine All paper used in the machine should be long grain Other Paper Properties Porosity Indicates the density of paper fiber Stiffness Limp paper may buckle in the machine resulting in paper jams Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl one way if left unpacked Electrostatic discharge During the printing process the paper is electrostatically charged to attract the toner The paper must be able to release this charge so that printed sheets do not cling together in the Output Tray Whiteness The contrast of the printed page depends on the whiteness of the paper Whiter paper provides a sharper brighter appearance Quality control Uneven sheet size corners that are not square ragged edges welded uncut sheets and crushed edges and corners can cause the machine to malfunction in various ways A quality paper supplier should take considerable care to ensure that these problems do not occur Packaging Paper should be packed in a sturdy carton to protect it from damage during transport Quality paper obtained from a reputable supplier is usually correctly packaged Note You might see the pr
322. urns to the Printed Pages Counter Reset menu screen without resetting the counter Account List Account List operation This specifies the setting for the department to be used for setting Job Accounting Add Account registration Use this procedure to add a new account Note Because account IDs are managed as numeric strings 1 and 001 are handled as different accounts amp Also once Job Accounting is enabled no jobs are printed unless information is attached showing the accounts from which the jobs are being printed 4 124 Operation Panel 1 Inthe Account Local menu press A or V to select Account List 2 Press OK The Account List menu appears showing a list of account Ursi the registered accounts in ascending order se 00000002 ge 00000003 3 Press Add Right Select The Account ID menu screen Account ID OK appears 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the account ID to be added 5 Press OK Once the account has been added a list of selection options appears aie 00000004 Pad OK Delete Exit This message appears if the account ID has already been registered This account ID is already registered Detail Edit Checking editing registered account ID settings This procedure allows you to check or edit registered accounts 1 Inthe Account Local menu press A or V to select Account List 2 Press OK The Account
323. urred in the USB memory device Look at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Split the large file into multiple smaller files The USB memory is write protected Remove the write protection The USB memory is broken Even if the problem is not solved format the USB memory with the device or use the new USB memory compatible with the printer 04 There is no available space Delete unnecessary files etc in order to free up space Waste toner box is Tl Replace the waste toner box For details refer to Replacing the Waste Toner Box on page 7 7 Waste toner box is improperly placed The waste toner box is not installed correctly Set it correctly For details refer to Replacing the Waste Toner Box on page 7 7 8 15 Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams If paper jams in the paper transport system or no paper sheets are fed at all the Paper jam message appears and the location of the paper jam the component where the paper jam has occurred is also indicated Status Monitor or Command Center RX can indicate the location of the paper jam the component where the paper jam has occurred Remove the paper jam After removing the paper jam the printer will resume printing IMPORTANT The printer may not feed the paper correctly depending on the paper type Pri
324. ursor right and left 4 Press OK The date is set and the Date Setting menu reappears 1 Inthe Date Setting menu press A or V to select Time 2 Press OK The Time screen appears 3 Use the numeric keys or A or V to set the hour minute and second Use lt and gt to move the cursor right and left 4 Press OK The time is set and the Date Setting menu reappears One of three formats can be selected for the date format 1 Inthe Date Setting menu press A or V to select Date Format 2 Press OK The Date Format screen appears 3 Press A or V to select the desired date format 4 79 Operation Panel The following date formats can be selected Month Day Year Day Month Year Year Month Day 4 Press OK The date format is set and the Date Setting menu reappears Time Zone time difference setting Set the time difference from GMT 1 Inthe Date Setting menu press A or V to select Time Zone 2 Press OK The Time Zone screen appears Time Zone pa OK GMT Casablanca G5 GMT Greenwich Mean GMT Monrovia Reyk 3 Press A or V to select the location 4 Press OK The time zone is set and the Date Setting menu reappears Note If you select a region that does not utilize summer time the amp N summer time setting will not appear Summer Time summer time setting Set summer time 1 Inthe Date Setting menu press A or V to select Summer Time 2 Press OK The Summer Time scr
325. use If you ever leave the printer unused for a long period of time remove the power cord from the wall outlet We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that may occur when the printer is used next time Moving the Printer When you move the printer Move it gently Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the printer Besure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the printer Keep the printer horizontal WARNING If you ship the printer remove and pack the developer unit in a plastic bag and ship them separately from the printer Maintenance 7 12 8 Troubleshooting This chapter contains explanations on the following topics General Gu idelhe S e ast Rui ci Sciigis aa a a ea aa aaa ana aeaa Rasiai aaae Error Messages A A Gleanng Paper dams econ If a problem cannot be corrected contact your service technician 8 1 Troubleshooting General Guidelines The table below provides basic solutions for problems you may encounter with the printer We suggest you consult this table to troubleshoot the problems before calling for service Symptom Check Items Corrective Action Print quality is not good Refer to Print Qualit
326. velope 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm Envelope C4 229 x 324 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm Executive 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 Envelope 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Envelope 6 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 When you load envelopes or Hagaki cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up For the procedure for printing refer to the Printer Driver User Guide Hagaki Close the flap Oufukuhagaki Return postcard Cardstock Portrait form envelopes IMPORTANT Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki return postcard How to load envelopes orientation and facing will differ depending on the type of envelope Be sure to load it in correctly otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face Landscape form envelopes Open the flap Note When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray select the envelope type by referring to Media Type amp Paper type setting for the MP tray on page 4 31 2 34 Preparation before Use Paper stopper When using paper larger than A4 R Letter R open the paper stopper as shown in the figure 2 35 Preparation before Use 2 36 3 Printing This chapter contains explanations on the following topics Printing irom Applications PP eee 3 2 Canceling a Priming JOB
327. very and Energy Saver The default setting is Energy Saver mode Quick Recovery Mode The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver mode The message display goes off when sleep mode is entered and the Ready indicator flashes The machine recovers quickly when OK is pressed The machine also automatically recovers and prints when a job is detected If print data is received during Sleep the print job is performed while the message display remains unlit To use the printer press OK Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly For more information about configuring settings refer to Sleep Timer Sleep timer timeout time on page 4 91 Energy Saver Mode This mode reduces power consumption even more than quick recovery mode and allows Sleep mode to be set separately for each function IMPORTANT Cautions when setting the Energy Saver mode The data stored on the RAM disk is deleted when the machine goes into Energy Saver mode The machine will not recover from Energy Saver mode if printing data is received from a computer via a USB cable An ID card is not recognized when in Energy Saver mode To use the printer press OK The printer will be ready to use within 18 seconds when Energy Saver mode is set For more information on Energy Saver settings refer to Sleep Level Set Sleep level setting on page 4 89 Power Off Timer If the
328. xecutive 7 25 x 10 5 inches Yes Yes Yes Oficio II 8 5 x 13 inches Yes Yes Yes 8K 273 x 394 mm Yes Yes Yes 16K 197 x 273 mm Yes Yes Yes ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Yes Yes Yes Hagaki 100 x 148 mm No No Yes OufukuHagaki 148 x 200 mm No No Yes Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm No No Yes Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm No No Yes Custom Cassette 105 to 297 mm x 148 to 432 mm 4 13 to 11 69 inches x 5 83 to 17 00 inches MP Tray 70 to 297 mm x 148 to 450 mm 2 76 to 11 69 inches x 5 83 to 17 72 inches Paper Feeder PF 4100 148 to 297 mm x 210 to 432 mm 5 83 to 11 69 inches x 8 27 to 17 00 inches Smoothness The paper should have a smooth uncoated surface Paper with a rough or sandy surface can cause voids in the printed output Paper that is too smooth can cause multiple feeding and fogging problems Fogging is a gray background effect Basis Weight Basis weight is the weight of paper expressed in grams per square meter g m Paper that is too heavy or too light may cause feed errors or paper jams as well as premature wear of the product Uneven weight of paper namely uneven paper thickness may cause multiple sheet feeding or print quality problems such as blurring because of poor toner fusing The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 120 g m 16 and 32 Ib ream for the cassette and between 60 and 220 g m 16 and 59 Ib ream for the MP tray Paper Weight Equivalence Table The paper weight is listed in pounds Ib and metric grams per square meter g m The
329. xit 3 Press A or V to select Other Paper Size 4 Press OK The Other Paper Size screen appears listing the paper sizes that can be used in the cassette Other Paper Size Mm 93 a3 The available paper sizes are as follows A4 A3 A4 R A4 A5 R A5 1 A6 1 B4 B5 R B5 1 B6 1 Folio 216x340mm Ledger Letter R Letter Legal Statement Executive 4 34 Operation Panel Oficio II 8K 16K ISO B5 Custom 1 Only be used in Cassette 1 D Press A or V to select the desired paper size Note When Custom is selected it is possible to enter the SS paper size For details refer to Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size on page 4 35 6 Press OK The paper size for the cassette is set and the Cassette Set menu screen reappears If you selected Custom in step 4 use the procedure below to specify the paper length and width Custom PaperSize Setting a Custom Paper Size In the procedure below select the units to be used for entering the custom paper size and then enter the paper width and length As shown in the figure enter the Y and X values for the paper size using the selected units Cassette 148 to 432 mm 5 83 to 17 00 inches Paper Feeder PF 4100 210 to 432 mm 8 27 to 17 00 inches Y Dimension X Dimension Cassette 105 to 297 mm
330. y Problems on page 8 3 Paper is jammed Refer to Clearing Paper Jams on page 8 16 Nothing lights on the operation panel even when power is turned on and the fan makes no noise Check that the power cord is properly plugged into the power outlet Plug in the power cord securely and try turning on the printer s power again If the corrective action above will not solve the problem pull out the power cord from the outlet Wait more than 1 minute and then plug the power cord into the outlet and try turning on the printer s power again Press the power switch The printer prints a status page but does not print jobs from the computer Check the printer cable or the interface cable software Connect both ends of the printer cable securely Try replacing the printer cable or the interface cable Check program files and application Try printing another file or using another print command If the problem occurs only with a specific file or application check the printer driver settings for that application The printer is emitting steam in the area around the top tray Check the room temperature to see if it is low or if damp paper was used Depending on the printing environment and the paper s condition the heat generated during printing will cause the moisture in the paper to evaporate and the steam emitted may look like smoke This is not a problem and you can continue printing
331. y field Press OK The Login Password entry screen is displayed Enter the Login Password using the numeric keys then press OK The login screen reappears Note The initial setting for the administrator s Login SV Password is 4000 For details on entering characters refer to Character Entry Method on page A 2 Pressing Login Right Select If the entered Login User Name and Login Password are correct the User Job Account menu screen appears 10 Press A or V to select User Login Set 11 Press OK The User Login Set menu appears 4 111 Operation Panel User Login This enables user login administration This switches the User Login Administration On Off and sets the authentication network server 1 Inthe User Login Set menu press A or V to select User Login 2 Press OK The User Login menu screen appears User Login i Login Type Login Type Enabling of User Login Administration Select Netwk Authentic to enable User Login Administration 1 Inthe User Login menu press A or V to select Login Type 2 Press OK The Login Type screen appears User Login Ui Login Type 3 Press A or V to select Netwk Authentic OrOff Login Type Pad OK Netwk Authentic 4 Press OK The User Login menu reappears Note When Netwk Authentic is selected set the network authentication server Netwk Auth Set Netwk authentication setting Set th

KYOCERA P4040dn

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents